Professional Documents
Culture Documents
ReinforcedConcreteSolMan PDF
ReinforcedConcreteSolMan PDF
A continuous pattern of mortar cracks begins to form. As a result there are few undamaged portions
to carry load and the stress-strain curve is highly nonlinear.
At the critical stress the lateral strain begins to increase rapidly. This causes the concrete core within
the spiral to expand, stretching the spiral. The tension in the spiral is equilibrated by a radial
compression in the core. This in turn, biaxially compresses the core, and thus strengthens it.
When concrete is subjected to sustained loads greater than the critical stress, it will eventually fail.
3-2 A group of 45 tests on a given type of concrete had a mean strength of 4780 psi and a
standard deviation of 525 psi. Does this concrete satisfy the requirements of ACI Code
Section 5.3.2 for 4000-psi concrete?
Using
(for design)
Using
(for design)
Because both of these exceed 4000 psi, the concrete satisfies the requirements of ACI Code
Section 5.3.2 for 4000 psi concrete.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3-1
3-3 The concrete containing Type I cement in a structure is cured for 3 days at 70° F
followed by 6 days at 40° F. Use the maturity concept to estimate its strength as a
fraction of the 28-day strength under standard curing.
5
Note: C F 32 , so 70° F = 21.1° C and 40° F = 4.4° C
9
From Eq. 3-6:
n
M (Ti 10)(ti )
i 1
From Fig. 3-8 the compressive strength will be between 0.60 and 0.70 times the 28-day strength
under standard curing conditions.
3-4 Use Fig. 3-12a to estimate the compressive strength 2 for bi-axially loaded concrete
subject to:
3-5 The concrete in the core of a spiral is subjected to a uniform confining stress 3 of 750
psi. What will the compressive strength, 1 be? Assume .
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3-2
3-6 What factors affect the shrinkage of concrete?
(a) Relative humidity. Shrinkage increases as the relative humidity decreases, reaching a
maximum at RH ≤ 40%.
(b) The fraction of the total volume made up of paste. As this fraction increases,
shrinkage increases.
(c) The modulus of elasticity of the aggregate. As this increases, shrinkage decreases.
(d) The water/cement ratio. As the water content increases, the aggregate fraction
decreases, causing an increase in shrinkage.
(e) The fineness of the cement. Shrinkage increases for finely ground cement that has
more surface area to attract and absorb water.
(f) The effective thickness or volume to surface ratio. As this ratio increases, the
shrinkage occurs more slowly and the total shrinkage is likely reduced.
(a) The ratio of sustained stress to the strength of the concrete. The creep coefficient, ,
is roughly constant up to a stress of 0.5 fc', but increases above that value.
(b) The humidity of the environment. The amount of creep decreases as the RH increases
above 40%.
(c) As the effective thickness or volume to surface ratio increases, the rate at which creep
develops decreases.
(d) Concretes with a high paste content creep more that concretes with a large aggregate
fraction because only the paste creeps.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3-3
3-8 A structure is made from concrete containing Type 1 cement. The average ambient
relative humidity is 70 percent. The concrete was moist-cured for 7 days. fc' = 4000 psi.
(a) Compute the unrestrained shrinkage strain of a rectangular beam with cross-
sectional dimensions of 8 in. x 20 in. at 2 years after the concrete was placed.
2. Use Eq. (3-31) to compute the volume/surface area ratio modification factor:
( ) ( )
⁄ ⁄
( )
( ) ( )
(b) Compute the stress dependent (creep) strain in the concrete of a 20 in. x 20 in. x
12 ft column at age 3 years. A compression load of 400 kips was applied to the
column at 30 days.
⁄
,
Where:
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
[ the publisher prior to⁄ any prohibited
permission should be obtained from ] reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3-4
2. Compute the creep coefficient for the time since loading, , using Eq. (3-35).
3. Compute the total stress-dependent strain, ( ), using Eqs. (3-5), (3-18), and (3-35).
First, calculate the creep strain since the load was applied:
( ) √ √
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
( ) √ ( ) √
( )
( )
( )
Thus,
( ) ( ) ( )
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3-5
Chapter 4
4-1 Figure P4-1 shows a simply supported beam and the cross-section at midspan. The
beam supports a uniform service (unfactored) dead load consisting of its own weight
plus 1.4 kips/ft and a uniform service (unfactored) live load of 1.5 kip/ft. The
concrete strength is 3500 psi, and the yield strength of the reinforcement is 60,000
psi. The concrete is normal-weight concrete. Use load and strength reduction factors
from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and 9.3. For the midspan section shown in part (b) of
Fig. P4-1, compute and show that it exceeds .
24 12
Weight/ft = 0.15 0.3 kips/ft
144
3. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding. From equilibrium (using Eq. (4-14)):
A f
s y 3.00 60000
c 5.04 in.
0.85 f ' b 0.85 3500 12
1
c
For fc' 3500 psi, 1 0.85 . Therefore, c 5.04 5.93 in.
1 0.85
s
Using Eq.(4-18)
d c
t c cu
21.5 5.93
5.93
0.003 0.00788
Since, t 0.00788 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and =0.9. Then,
M n 0.9 285 kip-ft 256 kip-ft. Clearly, M n M u
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-1
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-2 A cantilever beam shown in Fig. P4-2. The beam supports a uniform service
(unfactored) dead load of 1 kip/ft plus its own dead load and it supports a
concentrated service (unfactored) live load of 12 kips as shown. The concrete is
normal-weight concrete with psi and the steel is Grade 60. Use load and
strength-reduction factors form ACI Code Section 9.2 and 9.3. For the end section
shown in part (b) of Fig. P4-2, compute and show it exceeds .
30 18
Weight/ft = 0.15 0.563 kips/ft
144
3. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding. From equilibrium (using Eq. (4-14)):
A f
s y 4.74 60000
c 2.79 in.
0.85 f ' b 0.85 4000 30
1
c
For fc 4000 psi, 1 0.85 . Therefore, c 2.79
'
3.28 in.
1 0.85
s
Using. Eq.(4-18)
d c
15.5 3.28
t c cu 3.28
0.003 0.011 > 0.0021
2.79
4.74 60000 15.5
2
M A f d 334 kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
Since, t 0.011 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and =0.9. Then,
M n 0.9 334 301 kip-ft 267 kip-ft. Clearly, M n M u
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-2
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-3 (a) Compare for singly reinforced rectangular beams having the following
properties. Use strength reduction factors from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and
9.3.
Beam b d f c' fy
Bars
No. (in.) (in.) (psi) (psi)
1 12 22 3 No. 7 4,000 60,000
2 12 22 2 No. 9 plus 1 No. 8 4,000 60,000
3 12 22 3 No. 7 4,000 80,000
4 12 22 3 No. 7 6,000 60,000
5 12 33 3 No. 7 4,000 60,000
Beam No.1
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding.
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
For Beam 1, -
Beam No.2
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding.
( )
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-3
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
( ) ( ) ( )
Thus, > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s f y ).
s
( ) ( )
( )
For Beam 2, -
Beam No.3
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding.
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
For Beam 3, -
Beam No.4
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding.
For , . Therefore, ⁄ ⁄
( ) ( ) ( )
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-4
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Thus, > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s f y ).
s
( )
( )
For Beam 4, -
Beam No.5
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding.
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
For Beam 5, -
(b) Taking beam 1 as the reference point, discuss the effects of changing
and d on . (Note that each beam has the same properties as
beam 1 except for the italicized quantity.)
Beam M
n
No. (kip-ft)
1 167
2 250
3 219
4 171
5 257
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-5
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Effect of As (Beams 1 and 2)
An increase of 55% in As (from 1.80 to 2.79 in.2) caused an increase of 50% in M n . Increasing
the tension steel area causes a proportional increase in the strength of the section, with a loss of
ductility. Note that in this case, the strength reduction factor was 0.9 for both sections.
(c) What is the most effective way of increasing ? What is the least
effective way?
Disregarding any other effects of increasing d , As or f y such as changes in cost, etc., the most
effective way to increase M n is to increase the effective flexural depth of the section, d ,
followed by increasing f y and As . Note that increasing f y and As too much may make the beam
over-reinforced and thus will result in a decrease in ductility.
The least effective way of increasing M n is to increase f c' . Note that increasing f c' will cause a
significant increase in curvature at failure.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-6
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-4 A 12-ft-long cantilever supports its own dead load plus an additional uniform
service (unfactored) dead load of 0.5 kip/ft. The beam is made from normal-weight
4000-psi concrete and has in., in., and in. It is reinforced
with four No. 7 Grade-60 bars. Compute the maximum service (unfactored)
concentrated live load that can be applied at 1ft from the free end of the cantilever.
Use load and strength –reduction factors from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and 9.3. Also
check .
1. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, , assuming that tension steel is
yielding. From equilibrium (using Eq. (4-14)):
A f
s y 2.4 60000
c 2.65 in.
0.85 f ' b 0.85 4000 16
1
c
For fc' 4000 psi, 1 0.85 . Therefore, c 2.65 3.1 in.
10.85
s
Using Eq.(4-18)
d c
15.5 3.1
t c cu 3.1
0.003 0.012
16 18
Weight/ft of beam = 0.15 0.3 kips/ft
144
Factored dead load = 1.2 0.3 0.5 0.96 kips/ft
Factored dead load moment = wl 2 2 0.96 122 2 69.1 kip-ft
Therefore the maximum factored live load moment is: 153 kip-ft – 69.1 kip-ft = 83.9 kip-ft
Maximum factored load at 1 ft from the tip = 83.9 kip-ft / 11 ft = 7.63 kips
Maximum concentrated service live load = 7.63 kips / 1.6 = 4.77 kips
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
4-7
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3. Check of As ,min
The section is subjected to positive bending and tension is at the bottom of this section, so we
should use bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal to 189 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
200 200
As ,min bw d 16 15.5 0.82 in. < As (o.k.)
2
fy 60,000
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-8
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-5 Compute and check for the beam shown in Fig. P4-5. Use
psi and psi.
1. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers, where the distance from the
tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is given as d 19 in.
Assuming that the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than or equal to the thickness of the
compression flange, h f and that the tension steel is yielding, s y , using Eq. (4-16):
A f
s y 4.74 60000
1.55 in. h f 6 in. (o.k.)
0.85 f b e 0.85 4500 48
'
c
Comparing the calculated depth to the neutral axis, c , to the values for d and d t , it is clear that
the tension steel strain, s , easily exceeds the yield strain (0.00207) and the strain at the level of
the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, t , exceeds the limit for tension-controlled sections
(0.005). Thus, =0.9 and we can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :
1.55
4.74 60000 19
2
M A f d 432 kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
M n 0.9 432 kip-ft = 389 kip-ft
2. Check of As ,min
The section is subjected to positive bending and tension is at the bottom of this section, so we
should use bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal to 201 psi, so use 3 f c' in the numerator:
3 f c' 201
As ,min bw d 12 19 0.76 in.2 < As (o.k.)
fy 60,000
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-9
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-6 Compute and check for the beam shown in Fig. P4-6. Use
psi and psi.
1. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers, where the distance from the
tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is given as d 18.5 in.
Assuming that the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than or equal to the thickness of the
compression flange, h f and that the tension steel is yielding, s y , using Eq. (4-16):
A f
s y 4.74 60000
4.18 in. h f 5 in. (o.k.)
0.85 f ' b e 0.85 4000 20
c
2. Check of As ,min
The section is subjected to positive bending and tension is at the bottom of this section, so we
should use bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal to 190 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
200 200
As ,min bw d 12 18.5 0.74 in. < As (o.k.)
2
fy 60,000
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-10
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-7 Compute the negative-moment capacity, , and check for the beam
shown in Fig. P4-7. Use psi and psi.
1. Calculation of M n
This section is subjected to negative bending, so tension will develop in the top flange and the
compression zone is at the bottom of the section. ACI Code Section 10.6.6 requires that a portion
of the tension reinforcement be distributed in the flange, so assuming that the No. 6 bars in the
2
flange are part of the tension reinforcement: As 6 0.44 2.64 in.
The depth of the Whitney stress block can be calculated using Eq. (4-16), using b 12 in., since
the compression zone is at the bottom of the section:
( ) ( )
The steel is yielding s y 0.00207 and it is tension-controlled t 0.005 so = 0.9.
( )
( )
2. Check of As ,min
The flanged portion of the beam section is in tension because the beam is subjected to negative
bending. Therefore, the value of As ,min will depend on whether the beam is statically determinate.
Assuming that the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate floor system, the
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is
equal to 189 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
( )
( )
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-11
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-8 For the beam shown in Fig. P4-8, psi and psi.
The limits given in ACI Code Section 8.12 for determining the effective compression flange, be ,
for a flanged section that is part of a continuous floor system are:
4
be bw 2(8h f )
b 2(clear trans. distance)/2
w
Assuming that the columns are 18 in. 18 in. , the longitudinal span is approximated as:
18 in.
21 ft ft 22.5 ft
12 in.
ft
12 in.
The clear transverse distance for the 9 ft.-6 in. span is: 9.5 ft 8.5 ft
12 in.
ft
1 12 in. 18 in.
and for the 11 ft. span is: 11 ft 9.75 ft
2 12 in. 12 in.
ft ft
So, the average clear transverse distance is 9.125 ft
(b) Compute for the positive- and negative-moment regions and check
for both sections. At the supports, the bottom bars are in one layer; at
midspan, the No. 8 bars are in the bottom, the No. 7 bars in a second layer.
1. Calculation of M n
Tension steel area: As = 3 No. 8 bars + 2 No. 7 bars = 3 0.79 2 0.60 3.57 in.2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-12
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers. Assuming the section will
include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the distance from the extreme
tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest layer of steel is approximately 2.5 in.
Thus the distance from the top of the section to the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, d t ,
can be calculated to be:
The minimum spacing required between layers of reinforcement is 1 in. (ACI Code Section
7.6.2). Thus the spacing between the centers of the layers is approximately 2 in. So the distance
from the tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is:
Assuming that the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than or equal to the thickness of the
compression flange, h f 6 in. and that the tension steel is yielding, s y ; using Eq.(4-
16) we have:
A f
s y 3.57 60000
1.07 in. h f 6 in. (o.k.)
'
0.85 f b e 0.85 3500 67.5
c
Comparing the calculated depth to the neutral axis, c , to the values for d and d t , it is clear that
the tension steel strain, s , easily exceeds the yield strain (0.00207) and the strain at the level of
the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, t , exceeds the limit for tension-controlled sections
(0.005). Thus, =0.9 and we can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :
1.07
3.57 60000 17.8
2
M A f d 308 kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
M n 0.9 308 kip-ft = 277 kip-ft
Check of As ,min : The section is subjected to positive bending and tension is at the bottom of this
section, so we should use bw in Eq. (4-11). 3 f c' is equal to 177 psi, so use 200 psi in the
numerator.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-13
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
200 200
As ,min bw d 12 17.8 0.71 in. < As (o.k.)
2
fy 60,000
The tension and compression reinforcement for this section is provided in single layers.
Assuming the section will include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the
distance from the extreme tension or compression edge of the section to the centroid of the
tension or compression layer of steel is approximately 2.5 in.
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the tension steel is yielding
and use the trial and error procedure described in Section 4-7 to find the neutral axis depth, c.
Cc 0.85 fc'b1c 0.85 3.5 ksi 12 in. 0.85 4.5 in.=137 kips
T As f y 4.20 in.2 60 ksi 252 kips
Because T Cc C 's , we should increase c for the second trial.
With section equilibrium established, we must confirm the assumption that the tension steel is
yielding.
d c 18.5 5.9
using Eq.(4-18) 0.003 0.0064
s c cu 5.9
Thus, the steel is yielding 0.00207 and it is a tension-controlled section t s 0.0102 .
s
So, using 1c 0.85 5.9 in. 5.0 in. , use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n .
n 2
M Cc d C 's d d ' 179 kips 16 in. 74.6 kips 16 in.
Check of As ,min : The flanged portion of the beam section is in tension and the value of As ,min will
depend on the use of that beam. Since the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate
floor system, the minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw in Eq. (4-11).
Also, 3 f c' is equal to 177 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator.
200 200
As ,min bw d 12 18.5 0.74 in. < As (o.k.)
2
fy 60,000
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-15
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-9 Compute and check for the beam shown in Fig. P4-9. Use
psi and psi, and
1. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
Assuming that the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than or equal to the thickness of the
top flange, 5 in. and that the tension steel is yielding, s y , using Eq. (4-16) with
b 30 in. :
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
2. Check of As ,min
The flanged portion of the beam section is in tension and the value of As ,min will depend on the
use of that beam. Assuming that the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate floor
system, the minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw 2 5 10 in. in Eq.
(4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal to 189 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
200 200
As ,min bw d 10 32.5 1.08 in. < As (o.k.)
2
fy 60,000
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-16
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(b) the reinforcement is nine No. 8 bars.
1. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
Assuming that the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than or equal to the thickness of the
compression flange, h f 5 in. and that the tension steel is yielding, s y , using Eq. (4-
16) with b 30 in. :
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
2. Check of As ,min
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-17
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-10 Compute and check for the beam shown in Fig. P4-10. Use
psi and psi.
1. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, .
Tension will develop in the bottom flange and the compression zone is at the top of the section.
Thus, assuming that the tension steel is yielding, s y , in Eq. (4-16) we should use
b 2 6 12 in. and we find the depth of the Whitney stress block as:
A f
s y 4.8 60000
5.65 in.
0.85 f b 0.85 5000 12
'
c
For fc' 5000 psi, 1 0.80 . Therefore, c 5.65 7.06 in.
1 0.80
Check whether tension steel is yielding:
d c 23.5 7.06
using Eq.(4-18) t 0.003 0.007
s c cu 7.06
Thus, > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s f y ).
s
Since, t 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and =0.9.
We can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :
5.65
4.8 60000 23.5
2
M A f d 496 kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
M n 0.9 496 kip-ft = 446 kip-ft
2. Check of As ,min
The flanged portion of the beam section is in tension and the value of As ,min will depend on the
use of that beam.
Assuming that the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate floor system, the
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw 2 6 12 in. in Eq. (4-11). Also,
note that 3 f c' is equal to 212 psi:
212 212
As ,min bw d 12 23.5 1.00 in. < As (o.k.)
2
fy 60,000
However, for a statically determined beam, bw should be replaced by the smaller of
2bw 24 in. or be . Given that be is 42 in. for this beam section,
212 212
As ,min bw d 24 23.5 1.99 in.2 < As (o.k.)
fy 60,000
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-18
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-11 (a) Compute for the three beams shown in Fig. P4-11. In each case,
psi and ksi,
Beam No. 1
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers. Assuming the section will
include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the distance from the extreme
tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest layer of steel is approximately 2.5 in.
Thus the distance from the top of the section to the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, d t ,
can be calculated to be:
Assuming that the tension steel is yielding, s y , using Eq. (4-16):
For , . Therefore, ⁄ ⁄
( ) ( )
( )
( )
Beam No. 2
As was discussed for beam No. 1, d 32 in., dt 33.5 in. and d ' is given as d ' 2.5 in.
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the tension steel is yielding
and use the trial and error procedure described in Section 4-7 to find the neutral axis depth, c.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-19
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Try c d 4 8 in.
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
Try
( )
With section equilibrium established, we must confirm the assumption that the tension steel is
yielding.
( ) ( )
Clearly, the steel is yielding 0.00207 and it is a tension-controlled section.
s
So, using , use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n .
* ( ) ( )+ [ ( ) ( )]
Beam No. 3
As was discussed for beam No. 1, d 32.5 in., and dt 33.5 in.
The compression reinforcement for this beam section is provided in two layers and d ' is given as
3.5 in.
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will the same procedure as for beam No. 2
(assuming that the tension steel is yielding).
The depth of the neutral axis for this section should be smaller compared with beam section No.
2, since the compression reinforcement is increased for this section.
Try (Note that both layers of the compression steel will be in the compression zone)
( )
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-20
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Because T Cc C 's , we should decrease c for the second trial.
Try
( )
With section equilibrium established, we must confirm the assumption that the tension steel is
yielding.
( ) ( )
Clearly, the steel is yielding 0.00207 and it is a tension-controlled section.
s
So, using , use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n .
* ( ) ( )+ [ ( ) ( )]
(b) From the results of part (a), comment on whether adding compression
reinforcement is a cost-effective way of increasing the strength, , of a beam.
Comparing the values of M n for the three beams, it is clear that for a given amount of tension
reinforcement, the addition of compression steel has little effect on the nominal moment capacity,
as long as the tension steel yields in the beam without compression reinforcement. As a result,
adding compression reinforcement in not a cost effective way of increasing the nominal moment
capacity of a beam. However, adding compression reinforcement improves the ductility and
might be necessary when large amounts of tension reinforcement are used to change the behavior
from compression controlled to tension controlled.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-21
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4-12 Compute for the beam shown in Fig. P4-12. Use psi and
psi. Does the compression steel yield in this beam at nominal strength?
As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 0.79 in.2 = 4.74 in.2 , d 25 in. 2.5 in. 22.5 in.
As' = 2 No. 7 bars = 2 0.60 in.2 =1.2 in.2 , d ' 2.5 in.
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the tension steel is yielding
and use the trial and error procedure described in Section 4-7 to find the neutral axis depth, c.
Try ⁄
For psi, . Thus,
Since the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than 5.0 in. , 5.0 in. , the width of the
compression zone is constant and equal to 10 in., i.e. b 10 in.
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
Try
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
Since , the width of the compression zone is not constant. Using a similar
reasoning as in the case of flanged sections, where the depth of the Whitney stress block is in the
web of the section, the compression force can be calculated from the following equations (refer to
Fig. S4-12):
( )( )
With section equilibrium established, we must confirm the assumption that the tension steel is
yielding.
( ) ( )
Thus, the tension steel is yielding 0.00207 and it is a tension-controlled section.
s
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-22
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Summing the moments about the level of the tension reinforcement:
[ ( ) ( ) ( )]
[ ( ) ( ) ( )]
The strain in the compression steel at nominal moment capacity is 0.00185, the compression steel
has not yielded at nominal strength.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-23
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
bw
0.85f'c
ht a
f's
d
h
f
fs=fy
b (assumed)
a) total beam section and stress distribution
bw
a/2 d' Cs
ht a
Ccw
d
h
T1
F
b
b) Part 1: web of section and corresponding internal forces
bw
ht a (a+ht)/2
Ccf
d
h
T2
F
b
c) Part 2: overhanging flanges and corresponding internal forces
Fig. S4-12.1 Beam section and internal forces for the case of ht .
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
4-24
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 5
5-1 Give three reasons for the minimum cover requirements in the ACI code.
Note: See Section 5.3 “Concrete Cover and Bar Spacing” for further discussion.
5-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-3 Design a rectangular beam section, i.e. select b, d, h, and the required tension
reinforcement, at midspan for a 22 ft-span simply supported rectangular beam that
supports its own dead load, a superimposed service dead load of 1.25 kip/ft, and a
uniform service load of 2 kip/ft. Use the procedure in Section 5.3 for the design of
beam sections where the dimensions are unknown. Use and fy = 60 ksi.
Therefore, DL = 410 lb/ft seems like a good first estimate of the weight of the beam.
Step 2: Compute the total factored load and factored design moment, Mu:
Assume the desirable strain diagram shown in Fig. 5-27b, which leads to 0.9 .
From Eq. (5-19):
f ' 0.825 4,500 psi
1 c 0.0154 Note: β1 = 0.825 for f’c = 4,500 psi
4 fy 4 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
f 0.0154 60,000 psi
y 0.205
f 'c 4,500 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R f 'c (1 0.59) 0.205 4.5 ksi (1 0.59 0.205) 0.811 ksi
(Note that this R-factor is reasonable based on values given in Table A-3)
5-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Since no column dimensions are given which control the width of the beam, the designer can
assume any reasonable α value. Here we assume α = 0.7
1 1
M 3 3775 k-in 3
d u 19.5 in
R 0.7 0.9 0.811 ksi
h d 2.5 in 22 in
b d 0.7 19.5 in 13.65 in 14 in
Note that both h and b are rounded up to the nearest even inch value for constructability.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.90 in 2 60 ksi
a 4.37 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4.5 ksi 14 in
No further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very reasonable. Select 4#9
bars as bottom reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
As 4 Ab 4 1.0 in 2 4.0 in 2 3.95 in 2 OK
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 14 in is sufficiently
wide for 4 #9 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
5-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 4,500 psi, 3 f 'c 201 200 so use 3 f 'c
3 f 'c 3 4500
As ,min bw d 14 in 19.5 in 0.92 in 2 4.0 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 4.0 in 2 60 ksi
a 4.48 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4.5 ksi 14 in
We know that 1 0.825 (see above).
a 4.48 in
c 5.43 in
1 0.825
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 19.5 in - 5.43 in
t cu 0.003 0.0078 0.005 OK
c 5.43 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 4.48 in
M n As f y d 0.9 4.0 in 2 60 ksi 19.5 in 3725 k-in
2 2
M n 310 k-ft 308 k-ft M u
Note that other combinations of b, h, and As may also be correct if different assumptions were
made by the designer. If all checks listed in Step 6 are satisfied, without being unreasonably
conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
14in.
22in.
4 #9 bars
2.5in.
Fig. S5-4 Cross-section of final design at mid-span
5-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-4 The rectangular beam shown in Fig. P5-4 carries its own dead load (you must guess
values for b and h) plus an additional uniform service load of 0.5 kip/ft and a uniform
service live load of 1.5 kip/ft. The dead load acts on the entire beam, of course, but
the live load can act on parts of the span. Three possible loading cases are shown in
Fig. P5-4. Use load and strength reduction factors from ACI Code sections 9.2 and
9.3.
a) Draw factored bending-moment diagrams for the three loading cases shown
and superimpose them to draw a bending-moment envelope.
So, using wu 1.2wD 1.6wL from ACI 318-08, Chapter 9, the bending-moment envelope is as
follows:
5-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
b) Design a rectangular beam section for the maximum positive bending moment
between the supports, selecting b, d, h, and the reinforcing bars. Use the
procedure in Section 5.3 for the design of beam sections where the dimensions
are unknown. Use f’c = 5000 psi and fy = 60 ksi.
It is necessary to design this beam section for both negative and positive bending. The
need for a practical design makes it reasonable to assume that the outer dimensions of the beam
will be constant along the length, and that these dimensions will be controlled by the design of the
section subjected to the largest absolute value of moment. As seen in Part (a), the largest expected
moment is a positive moment of 226 kip-ft (2715 k-in). Therefore, it is reasonable to begin the
beam design by designing the beam at this location.
Assume the strain diagram shown in Fig. 5-27b, which leads to 0.9 .
From Eq. (5-19):
f ' 0.80 5,000 psi
1 c 0.0167 Note: β1 =0.80 for f’c = 5,000 psi
4 fy 4 60,000 psi
Since no column dimensions are given which control the width of the beam, the designer can
assume any reasonable α value. Here we assume α = 0.7
1 1
M 3 2715 k-in 3
d u 17.0 in 17.5 in
R 0.7 0.9 0.882 ksi
h d 2.5 in 20 in
b d 0.7 17.5 in 12.5 in 14 in
Note that both h and b are rounded up to the nearest even inch value for constructability.
So, using pattern loading again, the maximum positive moment is: M u 222 k-ft 2670 k-in
5-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
No further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very reasonable. Select 4#8
bars as bottom reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
As 4 Ab 4 0.79 in 2 3.16 in 2 3.11 in 2 OK
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 14 in is sufficiently
wide for 4 #8 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 5,000 psi, 3 f 'c 212 200 so use 3 f 'c
3 f 'c 3 5000
As ,min bw d 14 in 17.5 in 0.87 in 2 3.16 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.16 in 2 60 ksi
a 3.19 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 5 ksi 14 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
5-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 3.19 in
M n As f y d 0.9 3.16 in 2 60 ksi 17.5 in 2715 k-in
2 2
M n 226 k-ft 222 k-ft M u
Therefore, this design for positive bending is sufficient without being too conservative.
c) Using the beam section from part (b), design flexural reinforcement for the
maximum negative moment over the roller support.
Since the outer dimensions are selected, the design for negative bending follows the method for
designing a rectangular section where the section dimensions are known. The maximum expected
negative moment, considering pattern loading, is - -
( ) ( )
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
( ) ( )
No further iterations are necessary since the solution has essentially converged. Select 2#9 bars as
top reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
Required Checks:
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 14 in is sufficiently
wide for 2 #9 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 5,000 psi, √ so use √
3 f 'c 3 5000
As ,min bw d 14 in 17.5 in 0.87 in 2 2.0 in 2
fy 60,000 psi
OK
5-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.0 in 2 60 ksi
a 2.02 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 5 ksi 14 in
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 2.02 in
M n As f y d 0.9 2.0 in 2 60 ksi 17.5 in 1780 k-in
2 2
The cross-sections of the beam design at maximum positive and negative bending moments is
shown below.
14in. 14in.
2.5in.
2 #9 bars
20in. 20in.
4 #8 bars
2.5in.
Fig. S5-5b Cross-sections of final designs for positive and negative bending respectively
Note that other combinations of b, h, and As may also be correct if different assumptions were
made by the designer. If all checks listed in Steps 4 and 6 are satisfied, without being unreasonably
conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-5 Design three rectangular beam sections, i.e. select b and d and the tension steel area
As, to resist a factored design moment, Mu = 260 kip-ft. For all three cases select a
section with b = 0.5d and use f’c = 4000 psi and fy = 60 ksi.
a) Start your design by assuming that εt = 0.0075 (as was done in Section 5.3)
The equations presented in section 5.3 initially assumed that εt = 0.0075. So, while no changes
need to be made, their derivation will briefly be shown to easy comparisons with the solutions to
parts (b) and (c).
cu 0.003
c d d 0.286d
cu s 0.003 0.0075
Cc 0.85 f 'c 1bc 0.85 f 'c 1b 0.286d 0.241 f 'c bd
Thus we have an expression for the initial ρ value when εt = 0.0075 is assumed, from Eq. 5-19:
0.241 f 'c 0.24 0.85 4,000 psi
initial 0.0136
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
f 0.0136 60,000 psi
y 0.204
f 'c 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R f 'c (1 0.59) 0.204 4 ksi (1 0.59 0.204) 0.718 ksi
(Note that this R-factor is reasonable based on values given in Table A-3)
From Eq. (5-23):
M 3120 k-in
bd 2 u 4830 in 3 Note that with εt = 0.0075, 0.9
R 0.9 0.718 ksi
We are told to assume α = 0.5
1 1
M 3 3120 k-in 3
d u 21.3 in 21.5 in
R 0.5 0.9 0.718 ksi
b d 0.5 21.5 in 10.8 in 12 in
Note that both d and b are rounded up so that h and b both result in even inch values for
constructability.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
5-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
No further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very reasonable. Select 3#9
bars as bottom reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
As 3 Ab 3 1.0 in 2 3.0 in 2 3.0 in 2 OK
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 12 in is sufficiently
wide for 3 #9 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 4,000 psi, 3 f 'c 190 200 so use 200.
200 psi 200 psi
As ,min bw d 12 in 21.5 in 0.86 in 2 3.0 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.0 in 2 60 ksi
a 4.41 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
We know that 1 0.85 .
a 4.41 in
c 5.19 in
1 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 21.5 in - 5.19 in
t cu 0.003 0.0094 0.005 OK
c 5.19 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 4.41 in
M n As f y d 0.9 3.0 in 2 60 ksi 21.5 in 3125 k-in
2 2
M n 260 k-ft 260 k-ft M u
5-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
We need to re-derive an expression for ρ, using the same approach used in part (a).
cu 0.003
c d d 0.375d
cu s 0.003 0.005
Cc 0.85 f 'c 1bc 0.85 f 'c 1b 0.375d 0.319 1 f 'c bd
Now, enforce equilibrium:
Cc T
0.3191 f 'c bd As f y
Thus we have an expression for the initial ρ value when εt = 0.005 is assumed:
0.3191 f 'c 0.319 0.85 4,000 psi
initial 0.0181
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
f 0.0181 60,000 psi
y 0.271
f 'c 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R f 'c (1 0.59) 0.271 4 ksi (1 0.59 0.271) 0.911 ksi
(Note that this R-factor is reasonable based on values given in Table A-3)
From Eq. (5-23):
M 3120 k-in
bd 2 u 3805 in 3 Note that with εt = 0.005, 0.9
R 0.9 0.911 ksi
We are told to assume α = 0.5
1 1
M 3 3120 k-in 3
d u 19.7 in 19.5 in
R 0.5 0.9 0.911 ksi
h d 2.5 in 22 in
b d 0.5 19.5 in 10 in
Note that both h and b are rounded to even inch values for constructability. Normally these values
would be rounded up, but since the estimate for d is so much nearer to 19.5 in than 21.5 in, it is
rounded down in this solution. Adequate strength of the section will still be achieved by selection
of an appropriate As value.
5-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 10 in is sufficiently
wide for 3 #10 bars to be placed in a single layer. NOT OK
So, either different bars must be selected, or the beam must be widened. Here we choose to widen
the beam so that b = 12 in.
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 4,000 psi, 3 f 'c 190 200 so use 200.
200 psi 200 psi
As ,min bw d 12 in 19.5 in 0.78 in 2 3.81 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.81 in 2 60 ksi
a 5.60 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
We know that 1 0.85 .
a 5.60 in
c 6.59 in
1 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 19.5 in - 6.59 in
t cu 0.003 0.0059 0.005 OK
c 6.59 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 5.60 in
M n As f y d 0.9 3.81 in 2 60 ksi 19.5 in 3435 k-in
2 2
M n 286 k-ft 260 k-ft M u
5-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Therefore, this design is sufficient. Since M n is 10% larger than M u , this design is perhaps too
conservative. Options for optimizing this design might be selecting different bars, or slightly
resizing the element. Notice that the design in part (a) was more efficient, so different initial
assumptions can lead to different designs.
c) Start your design by assuming that εt = 0.0035. You will probably need to add
compression reinforcement to make this a tension-controlled section.
We need to re-derive an expression for ρ, using the same approach used in part (a).
Thus we have an expression for the initial ρ value when εt = 0.0035 is assumed:
Before we can estimate the dimensions of the beam with Eq. (5-23), we need to determine .
Although we began by assuming that εt = 0.0035, tension controlled sections are so desirable that
we will ensure that the section is tension controlled. Compression reinforcement might be required.
Set .
We are told to assume α = 0.5. Also, since we had difficulty placing all the steel required in part
(b) due to insufficient beam width, and part (c) requires a higher reinforcement ratio to limit the
tensile strains, we will begin by assuming that two layers of reinforcement will be required.
⁄ ⁄
( ) ( )
Recall that we use 3.5 in. instead of 2.5 in. to account for the effect the second layer of steel has on
the location of the centroid of the tension reinforcement.
5-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Note that both h and b are rounded to even inch values for constructability.
( ) ( )
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
From Eq. (5-17):
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
No further iterations are necessary, since the solution has converged. Select 5#8 bars as bottom
reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
OK
a 6.97 in
c 8.2 in
1 0.85
5-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Try
( )
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 10 in is sufficiently
wide for 3 #8 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 4,000 psi, 3 f 'c 190 200 so use 200.
200 psi 200 psi
As ,min bw d 10 in 20.5 in 0.68 in 2 3.95 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming is valid.
From Eq. (4-18):
Ok, .
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
* ( ) ( )+ [ ( ) ( )]
- -
Therefore, this design is sufficient. Again, since M n is 10% larger than M u , this design is perhaps
too conservative. Options for optimizing this design might be selecting different bars, or slightly
resizing the element. Notice that the design in part (a) was more efficient, so different initial
assumptions can lead to different designs.
5-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
12in.
12in. 10in.
2 #8 bars
3.5in.
2.5in. 3 #9 bars 2.5in. 3 #10 bars 5 #8 bars
Fig S5-6 Cross sections of section designs from parts (a), (b), and (c), respectively
Note that the area of reinforcement provided is higher in the third design compared to
either of the first two, even though the section size is smaller. The design for part (c) also required
compression steel to ensure a tension controlled section, whereas the sections in parts (a) and (b)
were tension controlled as singly-reinforced sections.
5-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-6 You are to design a rectangular beam section to resist a negative bending moment of
275 kip-ft. Architectural requirements will limit your beam dimensions to a width of
12 in. and a total depth of 18 in. Using those maximum permissible dimensions, select
reinforcement to provide the required moment strength following the ACI Code
provisions for the strength reduction factor, . Use and .
Begin by trying to design the section as singly reinforced, with one layer of tension steel.
Set
( ) ( )
Either 5 #9 bars of 6 #8. To fit within the 12 in. beam width, 2 layers of bars are required.
Try 5 #9 bars:
Check whether the tension steel has yielded, and whether the section is tension controlled.
By iteration,
( )
* ( ) ( )+ [ ( ) ( )]
5-18
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 12 in. is sufficiently
wide for 3 #9 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 5,000 psi, √ so use 212.
√
Already verified that is OK, and calculated the nominal moment capacity.
5-19
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-7 For column line 2, use the ACI Moment Coefficients given in ACI Code section 8.3.3
to determine the maximum positive and negative factored moments at the support
faces for columns A-2 and B-2, and at the midspan of an exterior span and the
interior span.
K A
LL T 2 11.5 ft 30 ft
At column B-2:
15 15
Lr L 0.25 0.050 k/ft 0.25
2
0.034 k/ft
2
K LL AT 2 11.5 ft 55 ft
At midspan of interior span:
15 15
Lr L 0.25 0.050 k/ft 0.25
2
0.044 k/ft
2
K LL AT 2 11.5 ft 25 ft
Live load, per foot of beam:
12 ft 11 ft lb lb
At column A-2 and midspan of exterior beam: 41 2 472
2 ft ft
12 ft 11 ft lb lb
At column B-2: 34 2 391
2 ft ft
12 ft 11 ft lb lb
At midspan of interior span: 44 2 506
2 ft ft
5-20
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-21
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-8 Repeat problem 5-7, but use structural analysis software to determine the maximum
positive and negative moments described in problem 5-7. The assumed beam, slab
and column dimensions are given in the figure. Assume 12 ft story heights above and
below this floor level. You must use appropriate live load patterns to maximize the
various factored moments. Use a table to compare the answers from Problems 5-7
and 5-8.
We assume story heights of 12 ft above and below the continuous beam being modeled, and
include columns, fixed at their ends, in our model. Then we apply the appropriate load
combinations following Example 5-2, and the following design moments result:
5-22
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
K LL AT 2 6 ft 30 ft
since Lr ≥ LL, no reduction is possible, so use LL = 0.050 k/ft2
At column B-1:
15 15
Lr L 0.25 0.050 k/ft 0.25
2
0.042 k/ft
2
K LL AT 2 6 ft 55 ft
At midspan of interior span:
15 15
Lr L 0.25 0.050 k/ft 0.25
2
0.056 k/ft
2
K A
LL T 2 6 ft 25 ft
since Lr ≥ LL, no reduction is possible, so use LL = 0.050 k/ft 2
5-23
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Now, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following properties:
Column:
Ag 16 in 16 in 256 in 2
I g 16 in / 12 5,460 in 4
4
5-24
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
We assume story heights of 12 ft above and below the continuous beam being modeled, and
include columns, fixed at their ends, in our model. Then we apply the appropriate load
combinations following Example 5-2, and the following design moments result:
5-25
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-10 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for the beam m-n-o-p in Fig. P5-7. Be sure to comment
on the factored design moment at the face of the spandrel beam support at point m.
K LL AT 2 12 ft 30 ft
At n:
15 15
Lr L 0.25 0.050 k/ft 0.25
2
0.033 k/ft
2
K LL AT 2 12 ft 55 ft
At midspan of interior span:
15 15
Lr L 0.25 0.050 k/ft 0.25
2
0.043 k/ft
2
K LL AT 2 12 ft 25 ft
5-26
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Now, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following properties:
Beam (Use properties of the web as an approximation of the cracked properties):
Ag 12 in 24 in 288 in 2
I g 12 in 24 in / 12 13,800 in 4
3
Here we follow the recommendations from chapter 5 of the text, and assume that the beam is
pinned at m and supported by rollers (which are free to rotate) at n, o, and p. This neglects the
relatively small amount of moment transferred into the supporting beams due to their torsional
rigidity.
5-27
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Now apply the appropriate load combinations following Example 5-2, and the following design
moments result:
The software model assumes that there is no torsional rigidity supplied by the supporting beams.
Therefore, the moment that is predicted by the software at m is only due to the fact that the beam is
offset from the centerline of the supporting spandrel beam. While neglecting the torsional rigidity
of the spandrel beams is not realistic, it is also unlikely that the spandrel beam is torsionally rigid
enough to result in a moment as high as the ACI Design Moments.
5-28
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-11 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for the one-way slab strip shown in Fig. P5-7. For this
problem, find the factored design moments at all the points, a through i, indicated in
Fig. P5-7.
This live load cannot be reduced due to the very small influence area of the slab strip.
Also, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following cracked properties:
Beam:
Ag 12 in 6 in 72 in 2
I cr 0.5I g 0.5 12 in 6 in / 12 108 in 4
3
Here, we follow the recommendations from chapter 5 of the text, and assume that the slab strip is
pinned at a, and supported by rollers (which are free to rotate) at c, e, g, and i. Note that although i
is a point of geometrical symmetry, it cannot be modeled as fixed, since the pattern loads are not
necessarily symmetrical. Also note that pinning these supports neglects the relatively small
amount of moment transferred into the supporting beams due to their torsional rigidity.
Once the model is constructed, apply the appropriate load combinations following Example 5-2.
5-29
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Design Moments using ACI Moment Coefficients from section 8.3.3, compared to design moments
resulting from software model:
5-30
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-12 Use structural analysis software to find the maximum factored moments for the
girder on column line C. Find the maximum factored positive moments at o and y,
and the maximum factored negative moments at columns C-1, C-2, and C-3.
The remaining loads are transferred to the girder as a point load at mid-span. Loads transferring
from the adjacent interior span will transfer directly to the girder, whereas loads from the adjacent
exterior span must be amplified by 15% according to the ACI shear coefficient.
Dead load from beams and slab, applied at the mid-point of the girder between C-1 and C-2:
12 in 18 in 25 ft 6 in 6 in 12 ft 25 ft 6 in 150 lb 13.5 k
144 in 2 2 12 in 12 in 2 12 in ft 3
ft 2 ft ft ft
12 in 18 in 30 ft 6 in 6 in 12 ft 30 ft 6 in
1.15
lb
×150 3 18.8 k
144 in 2 2 12 in 12 in 2 12 in ft
ft 2 ft ft ft
18.8 k 13.5 k 32.3 k
Dead load from beams and slab, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the interior spans:
12 in 18 in 25 ft 6 in 6 in 11 ft 25 ft 6 in 150 lb 12.6 k
144 in 2 2 12 in 12 in 2 12 in ft 3
ft 2 ft ft ft
12 in 18 in 30 ft 6 in 6 in 11 ft 30 ft 6 in lb
1.15 150 3 17.5 k
144 in 2 2 12 in 12 in 2 12 in ft
ft 2 ft ft ft
12.6 k 17.5 k 30.1 k
Superimposed dead load, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the exterior spans:
25 ft lb
12 ft 2 20 ft 2 3.0 k
30 ft lb
1.15 12 ft 20 ft 3 4.14 k
2
3.00 k 4.14 k 7.14 k
Superimposed dead load, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the interior spans:
25 ft lb
11 ft 2 20 ft 2 2.75 k
30 ft lb
1.15 11 ft 20 3 3.80 k
2 ft
5-31
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
A
I 24 ft 55 ft
25 ft 30 ft
LLo 33 lb/ft 2 12 ft 1.15 12 ft 11.8 k
2 2
AI 46 ft 55 ft
25 ft 30 ft
LLo 27.4 lb/ft 2 12 ft 1.15 12 ft 9.78 k
2 2
25 ft 30 ft
LLy 27.4 lb/ft 2 11 ft 1.15 11 ft 8.97 k
2 2
AI 22 ft 55 ft
25 ft 30 ft
LLy 34 lb/ft 2 11 ft 1.15 11 ft 11.1 k
2 2
A
I 44 ft 55 ft
25 ft 30 ft
LLy 27.7 lb/ft 2 11 ft 1.15 11 ft 9.06 k
2 2
Now assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following cracked properties:
Column:
Ag 16 in 16 in 256 in 2
I g 16 in / 12 5,460 in 4
4
5-32
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
We assume story heights of 12 ft above and below the continuous beam being modeled, and
include columns, fixed at their ends, in our model. Then we apply the appropriate load
combinations following Example 5-2, and the following design moments result:
5-33
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-13 Assume the maximum factored positive moment near midspan of the floor beam
between columns A-2 and B-2 is 60 kip-ft. Using the beam dimensions given in
Fig. P5-7, determine the required area of tension reinforcement to satisfy all the ACI
Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement area. Select bars and
provide a sketch of your final section design.
Check that:
2 8 6 in 12 in 108 in
b f 11 ft -12 in OK
2 12 in 132 in
2
This seems like a very small area of required steel, so check minimum steel requirement before
selecting bars.
5-34
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Required Checks:
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 12 in is sufficiently
wide for 3 #5 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required. Since this requirement governed our bar selection, this is satisfied by default. OK
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 0.93 in 2 60 ksi
a 0.182 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 90 in
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 0.182 in
M n As f y d 0.9 0.93 in 2 60 ksi 21.5 in 1075 k-in
2 2
M n 89.6 k-ft 60 k-ft M u
Therefore, this design is sufficient. It seems too conservative, but that is because the minimum
area requirement governed bar selection.
90in.
24in.
2.5in. 3 #5 bars
Note that other selections As may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-35
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-14 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at the face of column B-2 for the
floor beam along column line 2 is -120 kip-ft. Using the beam and slab dimensions
given in Fig. P5-7, determine the required area of tension reinforcement to satisfy all
the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement area. Select
bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.
The maximum expected negative moment is given as M u 120 k-ft 1440 k-in
Although this is a T-section, there is no need to determine the effective flange width since the
compression zone is located in the web of the beam.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 1.38 in 2 60 ksi
a 2.03 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
Select 3 #5 bars over the web, and 4 #3 bars in the flange. This will result in “part” of the
reinforcement (about 1/3) being spread into the flange, and most (2/3) remaining over the web.
As 3 Ab1 4 Ab 2 3 0.31 in 2 4 0.11 in 2 1.37 in 2 1.30 in 2 OK
Required Checks:
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 12 in is sufficiently
wide for 3 #5 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
For f’c = 4,000 psi, 3 f 'c 190 200 so use 200 psi
3 f 'c 200 psi
As ,min bw d 12 in 21.5 in 0.86 in 2 1.37 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
5-36
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 1.37 in 2 60 ksi
a 2.01 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 2.01 in
M n As f y d 0.9 1.37 in 2 60 ksi 21.5 in 1515 k-in
2 2
M n 126 k-ft 120 k-ft M u
90in.
3 #5 bars and 4 #3 bars
12in.
24in.
Note that other selections of As may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that all flange
reinforcement that is considered to contribute to the negative bending capacity of this section is
placed within two flange depths of the web.
5-37
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-15 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at support n of the floor beam
m-n-o-p is -150 kip-ft. Using the design procedure for singly reinforced beam sections
given in Section 5-3 (design of beams when section dimensions are not known),
determine the beam dimensions and select the required area of tension reinforcement
to satisfy all the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement
area. Select bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.
The maximum expected negative moment is given as M u 150 k-ft 1800 k-in
Although this is a T-section, there is no need to determine the effective flange width since the
compression zone is located in the web of the beam.
Assume the desirable strain diagram shown in Fig. 5-27b, which leads to 0.9 .
From Eq. (5-19):
f ' 0.85 4,000 psi
1 c 0.0142 Note: β1 =0.85 for f’c = 4,000 psi
4 fy 4 60,000 psi
Since no column dimensions are given which control the width of the beam, the designer can
assume any reasonable α value. Here we assume α = 0.5
1 1
M 3 1800 k-in 3
d u 17.6 in 17.5 in
R 0.5 0.9 0.734 ksi
h d 2.5 in 20 in
b d 0.5 17.5 in 8.75 in 10 in
Note that both h and b are rounded to the nearest even inch value for constructability.
5-38
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.12 in 2 60 ksi
a 3.74 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 10 in
Since I am not satisfied that any of the possible bar combinations that fulfill this requirement are
not too conservative, I will choose to widen the beam slightly to help get a more efficient design.
Select b = 12 in.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.12 in 2 60 ksi
a 3.12 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1800 k-in
As 2.09 in 2
a 3.12 in
f y d 0.9 60 ksi 17.5 in -
2 2
Select 3 #6 bars over the web, and 4 #4 bars in the flange. This will result in “part” of the
reinforcement (about 1/3) being spread into the flange, and most (2/3) remaining over the web.
As 3 Ab1 4 Ab 2 3 0.44 in 2 4 0.2 in 2 2.12 in 2 2.09 in 2 OK
Required Checks:
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 12 in is sufficiently
wide for 3 #6 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
For f’c = 4,000 psi, 3 f 'c 190 200 so use 200
3 f 'c 200 psi
As ,min bw d 12 in 17.5 in 0.70 in 2 2.12 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
5-39
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.12 in 2 60 ksi
a 3.12 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
a 3.12 in
M n As f y d 0.9 2.12 in 2 60 ksi 17.5 in 1820 k-in
2 2
M n 152 k-ft 150 k-ft M u
90in.
3 #6 bars and 4 #4 bars
6in.
12in. 20in.
12in.
Fig. S5-15 Cross-section of final design for negative bending region
Note that other selections As may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that all flange
reinforcement that is considered to contribute to the negative bending capacity of this section is
placed within two flange depths of the web.
5-40
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-16 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at the face of column C-2 for the
girder along column line C is -250 kip-ft. Using the design procedure given in
section 5-4 for the design of doubly reinforced sections, determine the beam
dimensions and select the required areas of tension and compression
reinforcement to satisfy all the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum
reinforcement area. Select bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.
The maximum expected negative moment is given as M u 250 k-ft 3000 k-in
Although this is a T-section, there is no need to determine the effective flange width since the
compression zone is located in the web of the beam.
Since no column dimensions are given which control the width of the beam, the designer can
assume any reasonable α value. Here we assume α = 0.65
1 1
M 3 3000 k-in 3
d u 17.2 in 17.5 in
R 0.65 0.9 1.0 ksi
h d 2.5 in 20 in
b d 0.65 17.5 in 11.4 in 12 in
Note that both h and b are rounded to the nearest even inch value for constructability.
5-41
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.53 in 2 60 ksi
a 5.2 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
Select 3 #9 bars over the web, and 4 #4 bars in the flange. This will result in “part” of the
reinforcement (about 1/5) being spread into the flange, and most (4/5) remaining over the web.
As 3 Ab1 4 Ab 2 3 1.0 in 2 4 0.2 in 2 3.80 in 2 3.73 in 2 OK
Also, select compression reinforcement such that the area of compression reinforcement (A’s) is
greater than one half of the tension steel. Here we select 3 #8 bars so that A’s = 2.37 in2.
Required Checks:
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 12 in is sufficiently
wide for 3 #9 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
For f’c = 4,000 psi, 3 f 'c 190 200 so use 200
3 f 'c 200
As ,min bw d 12 in 17.5 in 0.70 in 2 3.80 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is valid.
First, an iterative procedure must be used to determine the depth of the neutral axis. Following the
procedure shown in Chapter 4, c = 4.2 in.
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 17.5 in - 4.2 in
t cu 0.003 0.010 0.005 OK
c 4.2 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
As a result of the iterations used to determine c, the following forces were determined:
T As f y 3.8 in 2 60 ksi 228 k
Cc 1c0.85 f 'c bw 0.85 4.2 in 0.85 4 ksi 12 in 145 k
cd' 4.2 in 2.5 in
C 's 0.003Es As 0.003 29,000 ksi 2.37 in 83 k
2
c 4.2 in
5-42
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
90in.
3 #9 bars and 4 #4 bars
12in. 20in.
2.5in. 3 #8 bars
12in.
Fig. S5-16 Cross-section of final design for negative bending region
Note that other selections of b, h, and As may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without
being unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that all flange
reinforcement that is considered to contribute to the negative bending capacity of this section is
placed within two flange depths of the web.
5-43
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5-17 For the one-was slab shown in Fig. P5-7, assume the maximum negative moment at
support c is -3.3 kip-ft/ft, and the maximum factored positive moment at midspan
point b is 2.4 kip-ft/ft.
(a) Using the given slab thickness of 6 in, determine the required reinforcement
size and spacing at both of these locations to satisfy ACI Code flexural
strength requirements. Be sure to check the ACI Code requirements for
minimum flexural reinforcement in slabs.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 0.16 in 2 60 ksi
a 0.24 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
Maximum reinforcement spacing is limited to 3h or 18 in, which is the same value for this 6 in deep
slab. Also, we must check reinforcement spacing for crack control. Since fy and cc are the same
here as in Example 5-7, the maximum spacing for crack control is 12 in. This governs.
5-44
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Remember to calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming
0.9 is valid.
d -c 5 in - 0.24 / 0.85 in
t cu 0.003 0.050 0.005 OK
c 0.24 / 0.85 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 0.12 in 2 60 ksi
a 0.17 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 4 ksi 12 in
Minimum reinforcement:
As ,min 2
0.0018bh 0.0018 12 in 6 in 0.13 in
ft ft
Minimum requirements govern here.
Maximum reinforcement spacing is limited to 3 h or 18 in, which is the same value for this 6 in
deep slab. Also, we must check reinforcement spacing for crack control. Since fy and cc are the
same here as in Example 5-7, the maximum spacing for crack control is 12 in. This governs.
5-45
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Remember to calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming
0.9 is valid.
d -c 5 in - 0.17 / 0.85 in
t cu 0.003 0.072 0.005 OK
c 0.17 / 0.85 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
(b) At both locations, determine the required bar size and spacing to be provided
in the transverse direction to satisfy ACI Code section 7.12.2 requirements for
minimum shrinkage and temperature reinforcement.
Since the positive flexural region was controlled by temperature and shrinkage reinforcement, the
reinforcement specified there would suffice in the transverse direction at all locations.
So, use #3 bars at 10 in. Placement near the top or bottom of the slab makes no difference here, so
specify that bars are to be placed wherever is easiest.
(c) For both locations provide a sketch of the final design of the slab section.
#3@8in. #3@10in.
6in. 6in.
12in. 12in.
Fig. S5-17 Cross-section of final design for negative and positive bending regions, respectively
Note that other selections of As may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-46
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 6
16.0
7.3
0.2
10
V, kips
-9.8
-17.7
(b) Assuming the beam is uncracked, show the direction of the principal tensile
stresses at middepth at points A, B, and C.
A B C
(c) On a drawing of the beam sketch the inclined cracks that would develop at
A, B, and C.
A B C
6-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6-2, 6-3, 6-4 and 6-5 Compute for the cross sections shown in Figs. P6-2, P6-3, P6-4
and P6-5. In each case use and
6-2 ( )
√ √ ⁄
⁄ [( )⁄ ]⁄
( )
6-3 ( )
√ √ ⁄
⁄ [( )⁄ ]⁄
( )
6-4 ( )
√ √ ⁄
⁄ [( )⁄ ]⁄
( )
6-5 ( )
√ √ ( ) ⁄
⁄ [( )⁄ ]⁄
( )
6-6 ACI Sec. 11.4.5.1 sets the maximum spacing of vertical stirrups at ⁄ . Explain
why.
Every inclined crack must be crossed by at least one stirrup. The assumed horizontal
projection of the crack is d so every crack will be crossed by at least one stirrup.
6-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6-7 Figure P6-7 shows a simply supported beam. The beam has No. 3 Grade 40 double-
leg stirrups with and 4 No.8 Grade 60 longitudinal bars with
. The plastic truss model for the beam is shown in the figure.
Assuming that the stirrups are all loaded to .
(a) Use the method of joints to compute the forces in each panel of the
compression and tension chords and plot them. The force in member
is ⁄ .
Joint U12 : Each inclined strut has a vertical component of 8.8 kips, therefore 6
struts are needed to equilibrate 52.8 kips force at Joint U12 as shown.
Joint U 8 : Total downward load is 26.4 kips applied load plus 8.8 kips in stirrup
U8 L8 , therefore 4 struts are needed to equilibrate 35.2 kips force at
U 8 as shown.
6-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
U 7 L1 8.8 36 15.84
Vertical Horizontal Horizontal
Member (cont’d) Component Projection Component
(kips) (in.) (kips)
U 6 L0 8.8 36 15.84
U 5 L0 8.8 30 13.20
U 4 L0 8.8 24 10.56
U 3 L0 8.8 18 7.92
U 2 L0 8.8 12 5.28
U1 L0 8.8 6 2.64
6-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
+10.56
+7.92
Horizontal Lower Chord
Member (cont’d) Joint Force in Strut Force
(kips) (kips)
+5.28
+2.64
Total: 55.4
The force in L0 L1 is 55.4 kips. This must be anchored in Joint L0 . The sum of the
horizontal forces in the struts at Joint L0 is 55.4 kips and H 0 at Joint L 0 .
6-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
+5.28 190.0
6-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(b) Plot ⁄ on the diagram from part (a) and compare the bar forces
from the truss model to those computed from ⁄ .
(c) Compute the compression stress in the diagonal member (see Eq. (6-
11)). The beam width, , is 12 in.
6-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6-8 The beam shown in Fig. P6-8 supports the unfactored loads shown. The dead load
includes the weight of the beam.
Vu , kips
51.0
Case (1)
- 51.0
(2) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load on the
left haft-span.
252 12.52
1.68 2.4
At the right support: Vu 2 2 28.5 kips
25
At the right support: Vu 1.68 25 2.4 12.5 28.5 43.5 kips
At the midspan: Vu 43.5 1.68 2.4 12.5 7.5 kips
Vu , kips
Case (2)
-28.5
-7.5
(3) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load on the
right haft-span.
Due to the asymmetry of loadings Case (3) to loadings Case (2), the shear
diagram of Case (3) is asymmetric to that of Case (2).
6-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Vu , kips
28.5
7.5
Case (3)
- 43.5
(b) Superimpose the diagram to get a shear force envelope. Compare the shear
at midspan to that from Eq. 6-26.
wLu 2.4 25
Eq. 6-26: Vu (midspan) 7.5 kips
8 8
51.0
Vu , kips
7.5
-7.5
- 51.0
(c) Design stirrups. Use and No.3 double-leg stirrups with
.
Vu
, kips
68.0
10.0
0.75
- 10.0
- 68.0
Maximum spacing
d/2 = 8.75 in.
Vu
6 fcbwd 82.1 kips Maximum spacing of d / 4 is not required.
Av f y 0.22 40000
14.6 in. (note 0.75 fc 50.3 psi 50 psi, use 50.3 psi )
0.75 f cbw 50.3 12
6-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Vu 0.22 40 17.5
Change this to 6 in. where 27.4 53.1 kips.
6
68 53.1
This occurs at x 12.5 12 38.5 in. from end.
68 10
Vu 0.22 40 17.5
Change this to 8 in. where 27.4 46.7 kips.
8
68 46.7
This occurs at x 12.5 12 55.1 in. from end.
68 10
Vu Vc 28.2
Terminate stirrups where 14.1 kips.
2 2
68 14.1
This occurs at x 12.5 12 = 139 in.
68 10
Provide No.3 U stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from the center of the support,
use 1 @ 2 in., 10 @ 4 in., 3 @ 6 in., and 10 @ 8 in. from each end.
6-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
0.22 40 17.5
(Note that Vs (max) 38.5 kips < 8 f c bw d 113 kips , OK)
4
6-9 The beam shown in Fig. P6-9 supports the unfactored loads shown in the figure. The
dead load includes the weight of the beam.
Loadings (2) and (3) will give the maximum positive and negative shears at B.
wDu 2.4 k/ft
wLu 2.4 k/ft
wu 4.8 k/ft
6-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
V, kips
33.0
28.8
(a1)
-5.4
-43.8
21.3
(a2)
2.1
14.4
-36.3
28.2
28.8
(a3)
-29.4
-10.2
(b) Draw the factored shear force envelope. The shear at B should be the
factored dead load shear plus or minus the shear from Eq. 6-26.
2.4 16
Eq. 6-26: Vu (midspan) 4.8 kips
8
6-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
33.0
28.8
Envelope from Part (a)
2.1
-10.2
-43.8
33.0
28.8
Envelope from Eq. 6-26
4.8-2.7 = 2.1
-4.8-2.7 = -7.5
-43.8
Eq. 6-26 is correct for s simple beam without overhangs. It is an approximation for all
other cases. However, we shall assume it is close enough and use it for the rest of this
example.
Check anchorage
Use No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a hook around a top bar.
Maximum spacing
d/2 = 10.8 in.
√
6-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
At d from support A:
Vu
44
44 2.8 21.5 34.8 kips
8 12
0.22 40 21.5
s 86 in. smax 10.8 in.
34.8 32.6
Use s = 10 in.
Part A-B: Provide No.3 stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from A use 1 @ 5 in., 7
@ 10 in.
Part BC: Provide No.3 stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from C use 1 @ 5 in., 9
@ 10 in.
6-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Vu Vc
Can terminate stirrups where . However, place minimum shear reinforcement
2
throughout part CD.
Part CD: Use No. 3 U stirrups, Grade 40. Starting from C use 1 @ 5 in., 7 @ 10
in.
6-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6-10 Fig. P6-10 shows an interior span of a continuous beam. The shears at the ends are
⁄ . The shear at midspan is from Eq. (6-26).
Vu
, kips
68.7
10.6
0.75
- 10.6
- 68.7
(b) Design stirrups using and .
Check anchorage
Use No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a bend around a top bar.
Maximum spacing
d/2 = 8.8 in.
Vu
6 f cbwd 79.8 kip Maximum spacing of d / 4 is not required.
Av f y 0.22 40000
14.7 in. (note 0.75 fc 47.4 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi )
50bw 50 12
Maximum spacing smax 8.8 in.
6-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Use s = 4 in.
Vu 0.22 40 17.5
Changing stirrup spacing to 6 in. where 26.6 52.3 kips
6
68.7 52.3
This occurs at x 1112 37.3 in.
68.7 10.6
Vu 0.22 40 17.5
Changing stirrup spacing to 8 in. where 26.6 45.9 kips
8
68.7 45.9
This occurs at x 1112 51.8 in.
68.7 10.6
Vu Vc 26.6
Terminate stirrups when 13.3 kips
2 2
68.7 13.3
This occurs at x 1112 126 in.
68.7 10.6
Use No.3 Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting from face of column at each end, use 1 @
2 in., 9@ 4 in., 3 @ 6in., and 9 @ 8in.
6-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6-11 Design shear reinforcement for the C1-C2 span of the girder designed in Example 5-
6 (final section given in Fig. 5-32). From the structural analysis discussed in
Example 5-6, the factored design end shears for this girder are 28.9 kips at the face
of column C1 and 39.2 kips at the face of column C2. Use and
.
Check anchorage
Select No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a bend around a top bar.
Maximum spacing
⁄
√
Maximum spacing of ⁄ is not required.
( √ )
Maximum spacing
⁄
The maximum spacing controls, so select s = 8 in.
⁄
The strength requirement controls, so select s = 6 in.
Use No.3 Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting from face of C2 column, use s = 6 in. until
past the point load, then use s = 8 in.
6-18
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6-12 Fig. P6-12 shows a rigid frame and the factored loads acting on the frame. The 7-kip
horizontal load can act from the left or the right. and
.
Vu , kips
CL 3.85
-3.85
CL
Wind from left
-27.2
-34.9
44 . 5
46
38 . 1
.0
Vu
, kips
CL
5.1
d from face
of column -5.1
face of column
Maximum spacing
Use No. 3
d/2 = 8.8 in.
√
6-19
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Provide No. 3, Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting at face of column from each end, use
1 @ 4 in., 11@ 8 in.
(b) Are stirrups required in the columns? If so, design the stirrups for the
columns.
( )√
( )
( )√ ( )
6-20
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 7
7-1 A cantilever beam 8 ft long and 18 in wide supports its own dead load plus a
concentrated load located 6 in from the end of the beam and 4.5 in away from the
vertical axis of the beam. The concentrated load is 15 kips dead load and 20 kips live
load. Design reinforcement for flexure, shear, and torsion. Use fy = 60,000 psi for all
steel and f’c = 3750 psi.
Since wide sections are desirable for torsion, estimate that α = 0.8, so d 18 in / 0.8 22.5 in .
Therefore, the dead load due to the weight of the beam is:
(22.5 in 2.5 in) 18 in
DL 0.15 k/ft 3 0.469 k/ft
144 in 2 /ft 2
So, the moment demand due to factored loads is:
0.469 k/ft 8 ft
2
Finally, determine As required for resisting this applied moment by first going back and
recalculating the weight of the beam with the final selected dimensions:
bh k 18 in 24 in k k
DL 2 2
0.15 3 2 2
0.15 3 0.45
144 in /ft ft 144 in /ft ft ft
So M u 393 k-ft 4720 k-in
Calculate the required area of steel, assuming jd 0.9d :
Mu 4720 k-in
As 4.52 in 2
a 0.9 60 ksi 0.9 21.5 in
fy d
2
7-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
As f y 4.52 in 2 60 ksi
a 4.73 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 3.75 ksi 18 in
Mu 4720 k-in
As 4.57 in 2
a 4.73 in
f y d 0.9 60 ksi 21.5 in -
2 2
No further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very reasonable. Use
b = 18 in, h = 24 in, and As = 4.57 in2. Bars will be selected later.
Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’c = 3,750 psi, 3 f 'c 184 200 so use 200 psi
200 200 psi
As ,min bw d 18 in 21.5 in 1.29 in 2 4.57 in 2 OK
fy 60,000 psi
Also, calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming 0.9 is
valid.
As f y 4.57 in 2 60 ksi
a 4.78 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 3.75 ksi 18 in
We know that 1 0.85 .
a 4.78 in
c 5.62 in
1 0.85
d -c 21.5 in - 5.62 in
t cu 0.003 0.0085 0.005 OK
c 5.62 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 0.9 for this beam design.
7-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Since Tu Tth , torsion must be considered. Also, since we are dealing with a statically determinate
system, we have a case of equilibrium torsion, in which the full factored torsion must be sustained
by our beam. Therefore, the design torsion cannot be reduced.
Check whether the section dimensions are sufficient to withstand the combined stresses due to
shear and torsion.
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
Vu Tu Ph V
2
c 8 f 'c
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d
Assuming #4 stirrups,
Ph 2 24 in 2 1.5 in 2 0.25 in 18 in 2 1.5 in 2 0.25 in 70 in
Aoh 24 in 2 1.5 in 2 0.25 in 18 in 2 1.5 in 2 0.25 in 297 in 2
2
0.75 2 3,750 psi 18 in 21.5 in 8 3,750 psi
2
53.4 k 18.8 k-ft 70 in
18 in 21.5 in
18 in 21.5 in
2
1.7 297 in 2
0.174 ksi 0.459 ksi
The section is sufficiently large.
7-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
s f yl in
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Minimum required: Al ,min Ph
f yl s f yl
At in 2
25bw in 2 in 2
Since 0.022 0.0075 , we must use 0.022
s in f yt in in
5 3,750 psi 432 in 2 in 2
Al ,min 0.022 70 in 1.0 0.66 in 2
60 ksi in
Use Al 0.693 in 2
Longitudinal bars are required in the corner of each stirrup. Also, longitudinal bars must be spaced
no more than 12 in apart around the perimeter of the section, so a bar is needed in the middle of
each face. So 8 bars are required.
The reinforcement required along the top of the beam for resisting moment and torsion is:
As 4.56 in 2 3 0.0866 in 2 4.82 in 2
Select 5#8 bars along the top of the beam such that As 5 Ab 5 1.0 in 2 5 in 2 4.82 in 2 .
7-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
7-2 Explain why the torsion in the edge beam A-B in Fig. 7-21a is called “equilibrium
torsion,” while the torsion in the edge beam A1-B1 in Fig. P7-3 is called
“compatibility torsion.”
If the edge beam A-B in Fig. 7-21c did not resist torsion, the beam would rotate,
uninhibited, about its longitudinal axis and fail to resist the action of load P. Essentially, the
torsional resistance of the beam is required for equilibrium to be satisfied.
On the contrary, if beam A1-B1 in Fig. P7-3 did not resist torsion, the beam would rotate
only slightly before the floor’s weight and superimposed loads would be redistributed to other
elements, thereby satisfying equilibrium through the redundancy of the system. The torsion in A1-
B1 only arises from the need to maintain compatibility of deformations between the ends of the
joists and the twisting of the edge beam.
7-3 The two parts of this problem refer to the floor plan shown in Fig. P7-3. Assume that
the entire floor system is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength, f’c = 4,500 psi. Also, assume that the longitudinal steel has a
yield strength of fy = 60 ksi and that the transverse steel has a yield strength of
fyt = 40 ksi.
a) Design the spandrel beam between columns B1 and C1 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
strength, minimum reinforcement area, and reinforcement spacing are
satisfied.
7-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
With that, we can determine the design moments using ACI Moment Coefficients:
At columns:
( ) ( )
At midspan:
( ) ( )
Note that n is taken as the average of the adjoining clear spans for calculating the negative
moment at the columns.
At midspan:
Note that n is taken as the clear span length of the interior span when calculating the shear
acting on the face of the support. Do not reduce this value to the n used for calculating
the negative moment at column B-1.
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the slab is
applying to the edge of the beam.
wu 1.2 0.075 k/ft 0.020 k/ft 1.6 0.050 k/ft 0.194 k/ft
n 12 ft -12 in 11 ft
0.194 k/ft 11 ft
2
w 2
Mu u n 0.978 k-ft
24 24
w 0.194 k/ft 11 ft
Vu u n 1.07 k
2 2
Therefore, the torsion applied to our beam by the slab is:
6 in
t 0.978 k-ft 1.07 k 1.51 k-ft/ft
12 in/ft
And thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
( ) ( )
7-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
At the column:
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,500 psi, and R = 229 psi, . So, at the
column,
At midspan:
Refer to Table A-3. There are no R values below 190 psi, which corresponds to the
√
√
minimum reinforcement ratio. Therefore,
Step 3: Determine whether torsion must be considered in the design of this beam. Begin by
determining the dimensions of the beam section active in torsion, and calculate the threshold
torsion.
height of beam below slab 18 in
f , where f is the length of flange active in torsion.
4h f 24 in
Therefore,
Acp 24 in 12 in 6 in 18 in 396 in 2
Pcp 24 in 12 in 18 in 18 in 6 in 30 in 108 in
396 in 2
2
Acp 2
Tth f 'c
Pcp 0.75 1.0 4,500 psi 73,000 lb-in 6.09 k-ft
108 in
Since Tu Tth , torsion must be considered in this design.
Step 4: Since the torsion resisted by this edge beam is not required to maintain equilibrium of the
structure, we have a case of compatibility torsion. Therefore we can likely reduce our Tu to the
following:
Acp 2
Tu ,comp 4 f 'c 0.75 4 1.0 4,500 psi
396 in 2 2
292,000 lb-in 24.4 k-ft
Pcp 108 in
Unfortunately, since Tu Tu ,comp , we cannot reduce our design torsion. Since our design torsion is
not being reduced, no redistribution of design moments is required in the adjoining slab.
Step 5: Determine whether the section is large enough to resist the combined actions of shear and
torsion. First assume that a closed #4 stirrup will be used in the web of this beam.
Aoh 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 174 in 2
Ph 2 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 58 in
7-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
√( ) ( ) ( √ )
√( √
) ( ) ( √ )
( )
Step 8: Evaluate the total required area of stirrups, and select spacing:
For strength:
Minimum required:
0.75 4500 bw 50.31 psi 12 in in 2
0.015
f yt 40,000 psi in
The strength requirement governs here.
If we select #4 stirrups,
7-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Select closed #3 stirrups at 5 in. spacing at the ends of the beam. It is also possible that stirrups are
not required along the full length of this beam. For torsion, determine where Tu Tth / . By
similar triangles, this occurs at 66.5 in. away from the face of the column. However, torsional
reinforcement must be continued for (d bt ) (21.5 in 12 in) 33.5 in past this theoretical point.
Therefore, no torsional reinforcement is required beyond 100 in. away from the face of the column.
Since Vu Vc / 2 at this point, no shear reinforcement is required beyond this point either.
For strength:
Minimum required:
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Al ,min Ph
f yl s f yl
A in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since t 0 0.0075 , we must use 0.0075
s ,min in f yt in in
5 4,500 psi 396 in 2 in 2 2
Al ,min 0.0075 58 in 1.92 in 2
60 ksi in 3
Use Al 1.92 in 2
Longitudinal bars are required in the corner of each stirrup. Also, longitudinal bars must be spaced
no more than 12 in apart around the perimeter of the section, so a bar is needed in the middle of
each vertical face. So 6 bars are required.
-At the columns, use #6 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, ⁄ ( )⁄ , so specify 3 #7 bars along the
top of the section.
-At midspan, use #6 bars in the top corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, ⁄ ( )⁄ , so specify 3 #7 bars along the
bottom of the section.
7-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
b) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and A2 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check that all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
strength, minimum reinforcement area, and reinforcement spacing are
satisfied.
With that, we can determine the design moments, but structural analysis software must be used
since the ACI Moment Coefficients cannot be applied when not all loads are distributed. Input the
structural model and applied loads using the appropriate pattern loading for the live loads.
At column A-1: M u 102 k-ft
At midspan: M u 128 k-ft
At column A-2: M u 139 k-ft
7-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the joist is
applying to the edge of the spandrel beam.
wu 1.2 0.225 k/ft 0.900 k/ft 0.240 k/ft 1.6 0.600 k/ft 2.60 k/ft
n 30 ft -12 in 29 ft
2.6 k/ft 29 ft
2
w 2
Mu u n 91.1 k-ft
24 24
Vu wu , po int 37.7 k
Thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
6 in 6 in
Tu M u Vu 91.1 k-ft 37.7 k 110 k-ft
12 in/ft 12 in/ft
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,500 psi, and R = 245 psi, 0.0042 . So, at
column A-1, As bd 0.0042 12 in 21.5 in 1.08 in 2 .
Mu 128 k-ft 12 in/ft
At midspan: R 308 psi
bd 0.9 12 in 21.5 in
2 2
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,500 psi, and R = 308 psi, 0.0054 . So, at
midspan, As bd 0.0054 12 in 21.5 in 1.39 in 2 .
Mu 139 k-ft 12 in/ft
At column A-2: R 334 psi
bd 0.9 12 in 21.5 in
2 2
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,500 psi, and R = 334 psi, 0.0058 . So, at
column A-2, As bd 0.0058 12 in 21.5 in 1.50 in 2 .
Step 3: Determine whether torsion must be considered in the design of this beam. Begin by
determining the dimensions of the beam section active in torsion, and calculate the threshold
torsion.
height of beam below slab 18 in
f , where f is the length of flange active in torsion.
4h f 24 in
Therefore,
Acp 24 in 12 in 6 in 18 in 396 in 2
Pcp 24 in 12 in 18 in 18 in 6 in 30 in 108 in
396 in 2
2
Acp 2
Tth f 'c
Pcp 0.75 1.0 4,500 psi 73,000 lb-in 6.09 k-ft
108 in
Since Tu Tth , torsion must be considered in this design.
7-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Step 4: Since the torsion resisted by this edge beam is not required to maintain equilibrium of the
structure, we have a case of compatibility torsion. Therefore we can likely reduce our Tu to the
following:
Acp 2
Tu ,comp 4 f 'c 0.75 4 1.0 4,500 psi
396 in 2 2
292,000 lb-in 24.4 k-ft
Pcp 108 in
Since Tu Tu ,comp , we can reduce our design torsion to 24.4 k-ft. Since our design torsion for the
spandrel beam is being reduced, it is necessary to redistribute the design moments for the joist that
frames into the spandrel beam. See chapter 7 for further discussion of why this is required.
Step 5: Determine whether the section is large enough to resist the combined actions of shear and
torsion. First assume that a closed #4 stirrup will be used in the web of this beam.
Aoh 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 174 in 2
Ph 2 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 58 in
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
Vu Tu Ph V
2
c 8 f 'c
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d
2
2 2 4,500 psi 12 in 21.5 in
25.6 k 24.4 k-ft 58 in
12 in 21.5 in 0.75 8 4,500 psi
12 in 21.5 in
2
1.7 174 in 2
0.344 ksi 0.503 ksi
The section is sufficiently large.
Step 8: Evaluate the total required area of stirrups, and select spacing:
in 2 in 2
For strength: 2 0.0330 0.066
in in
0.75 f c' bw 50.3 psi 12 in in 2
Minimum required: 0.015
f yt 40,000 psi in
The strength requirement governs here.
7-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
yl in 3
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Minimum required: Al ,min Ph
f yl s f yl
A in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since t 0.0330 0.0075 , we must use 0.0330
s ,min in f yt in in
5 4,500 psi 396 in 2 in 2 2
Al ,min 0.0330 58 in 0.94 in 2
60 ksi in 3
Use Al 1.28 in 2
Longitudinal bars are required in the corner of each stirrup. Also, longitudinal bars must be spaced
no more than 12 in apart around the perimeter of the section, so a bar is needed in the middle of
each vertical face. So 6 bars are required.
-At column A-1, use #5 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, As / bar 1.08 in 2 2 0.21 in 2 / 3 1.50 in 2 / 3 0.50 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
bars along the top of the section.
-At midspan, use #5 bars in the top corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, As / bar 1.39 in 2 2 0.21 in 2 / 3 1.81 in 2 / 3 0.60 in 2 , so specify 3 #8
bars along the bottom of the section.
-At column A-2, use #5 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, As / bar 1.50 in 2 2 0.21 in 2 / 3 1.92 in 2 / 3 0.64 in 2 , so specify 3 #8
bars along the top of the section.
7-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
7-4 The two parts of this problem refer to the floor plan shown in Fig. P7-3. Assume that
the entire floor system is constructed with sand light-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength, f’c = 4,000 psi. Also assume that the longitudinal steel has a
yield strength of fy = 60 ksi and that the transverse steel has a yield strength of
fyt = 60 ksi.
a) Design the spandrel beam between columns B1 and C1 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
strength, minimum reinforcement area, and reinforcement spacing are
satisfied.
Note that this problem is very similar to the previous problem. One noticeable change is the use of
lightweight concrete, which will affect the dead weight used in the calculation of the design loads.
Although no guidance is given on the density of the sand-lightweight concrete used in this
problem, any reasonable assumption would be acceptable. Here a density of 120 lb/ft 3 is assumed.
With that, we can determine the design moments using ACI Moment Coefficients:
At columns:
( ) ( )
At midspan:
( ) ( )
Note that n is taken as the average of the adjoining clear spans for calculating the negative
moment at the columns.
7-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
At midspan:
Note that n is taken as the clear span length of the interior span when calculating the shear
acting on the face of the support. Do not reduce this value to the n used for calculating
the negative moment at column B-1.
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the slab is
applying to the edge of the beam.
wu 1.2 0.060 k/ft 0.020 k/ft 1.6 0.050 k/ft 0.176 k/ft
n 12 ft -12 in 11 ft
0.176 k/ft 11 ft
2
wu n 2
Mu 0.887 k-ft
24 24
w 0.176 k/ft 11 ft
Vu u n 0.968 k
2 2
Therefore, the torsion applied to our beam by the slab is:
6 in
t 0.887 k-ft 0.968 k 1.37 k-ft/ft
12 in/ft
And thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
( ) ( )
At the column:
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,000 psi and R = 204 psi, . So, at the column,
At midspan:
Refer to Table A-3. There are no R values below 190 psi, which corresponds to the
minimum reinforcement ratio. Therefore,
7-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Step 3: Determine whether torsion must be considered in the design of this beam. Begin by
determining the dimensions of the beam section active in torsion, and calculate the threshold
torsion.
height of beam below slab 18 in
f , where f is the length of flange active in torsion.
4h f 24 in
Therefore,
Acp 24 in 12 in 6 in 18 in 396 in 2
Pcp 24 in 12 in 18 in 18 in 6 in 30 in 108 in
396 in 2
2
Acp 2
Tth f 'c
Pcp 0.75 0.85 4,000 psi 58,500 lb-in 4.88 k-ft
108 in
Since Tu Tth , torsion must be considered in this design.
Step 4: Since the torsion resisted by this edge beam is not required to maintain equilibrium of the
structure, we have a case of compatibility torsion. Therefore we can likely reduce our Tu to the
following:
Acp 2
Tu ,comp 4 f 'c 0.75 4 0.85 4,000 psi
396 in 2 2
234,000 lb-in 19.5 k-ft
Pcp 108 in
Unfortunately, since Tu Tu ,comp , we cannot reduce our design torsion. Since our design torsion is
not being reduced, no redistribution of design moments is required in the adjoining slab.
Step 5: Determine whether the section is large enough to resist the combined actions of shear and
torsion. First assume that a closed #4 stirrup will be used in the web of this beam.
Aoh 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 174 in 2
Ph 2 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 58 in
√( ) ( ) ( √ )
√( √
) ( ) ( √ )
7-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
( )
Step 8: Evaluate the total required area of stirrups, and select spacing:
For strength:
Minimum required:
√
If we select #4 stirrups,
Select closed #3 stirrups at 7 in. spacing at the ends of the beam. It is also possible that stirrups are
not required along the full length of this beam. For torsion, determine where Tu Tth / . By
similar triangles, this occurs at 75 in. away from the face of the column. However, torsional
reinforcement must be continued for (d bt ) (21.5 in 12 in) 33.5 in past this theoretical point.
Therefore, no torsional reinforcement is required beyond 108.5 in. away from the face of the
column. Since Vu Vc / 2 at this point, no shear reinforcement is required beyond this point either.
7-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
For strength:
Minimum required:
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Al ,min Ph
f yl s f yl
A in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since t 0 0.0075 , we must use 0.0075
s ,min in f yt in in
5 4,000 psi 396 in 2 in 2
Al ,min 0.0050 58 in 1.0 1.80 in 2
60 ksi in
Use Al 1.80 in 2
Longitudinal bars are required in the corner of each stirrup. Also, longitudinal bars must be spaced
no more than 12 in apart around the perimeter of the section, so a bar is needed in the middle of
each vertical face. So 6 bars are required.
-At the columns, use #5 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, ⁄ ( )⁄ , so specify 3 #7 bars along the
top of the section.
-At midspan, use #5 bars in the top corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, ⁄ ( )⁄ , so specify 3 #7 bars along the
bottom of the section.
7-18
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
b) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and A2 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check that all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
strength, minimum reinforcement area, and reinforcement spacing are
satisfied.
7-19
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the beam is
applying to the edge of the beam.
wu 1.2 0.180 k/ft 0.720 k/ft 0.240 k/ft 1.6 0.600 k/ft 2.33 k/ft
n 30 ft -12 in 29 ft
2.33 k/ft 29 ft
2
w 2
Mu u n 81.6 k-ft
24 24
Vu wu , po int 33.7 k
Thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
6 in 6 in
Tu M u Vu 81.6 k-ft 33.7 k 98.5 k-ft
12 in/ft 12 in/ft
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,000 psi, and R = 217 psi, 0.0037 . So, at
column A-1, As bd 0.0037 12 in 21.5 in 0.95 in 2 .
Mu 114 k-ft 12 in/ft
At midspan: R 274 psi
bd 0.9 12 in 21.5 in
2 2
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,000 psi, and R = 274 psi, 0.0048 . So, at
midspan, As bd 0.0048 12 in 21.5 in 1.24 in 2 .
Mu 123 k-ft 12 in/ft
At column A-2: R 296 psi
bd 0.9 12 in 21.5 in
2 2
Refer to Table A-3. For f’c = 4,000 psi, and R = 296 psi, 0.0052 . So, at
column A-2, As bd 0.0052 12 in 21.5 in 1.34 in 2 .
Step 3: Determine whether torsion must be considered in the design of this beam. Begin by
determining the dimensions of the beam section active in torsion, and calculate the threshold
torsion.
height of beam below slab 18 in
f , where f is the length of flange active in torsion.
4h f 24 in
Therefore,
Acp 24 in 12 in 6 in 18 in 396 in 2
Pcp 24 in 12 in 18 in 18 in 6 in 30 in 108 in
396 in 2
2
Acp 2
Tth f 'c
Pcp 0.75 0.85 4,000 psi 58,500 lb-in 4.88 k-ft
108 in
Since Tu Tth , torsion must be considered in this design.
7-20
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Step 4: Since the torsion resisted by this edge beam is not required to maintain equilibrium of the
structure, we have a case of compatibility torsion. Therefore we can likely reduce our Tu to the
following:
Acp 2
Tu ,comp 4 f 'c 0.75 4 0.85 4,000 psi
396 in 2 2
234,000 lb-in 19.5 k-ft
Pcp 108 in
Since Tu Tu ,comp , we can reduce our design torsion to 19.5 k-ft. Since our design torsion for the
spandrel beam is being reduced, it is necessary to redistribute the design moments for the joist that
frames into the spandrel beam. See chapter 7 for further discussion of why this is required.
Step 5: Determine whether the section is large enough to resist the combined actions of shear and
torsion. First assume that a closed #4 stirrup will be used in the web of this beam.
Aoh 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 174 in 2
Ph 2 24 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 12 in 2 1.5 in 0.5 in 58 in
From Eq. (7-33):
√( ) ( ) ( √ )
√( √
) ( ) ( √ )
At column A-1:
At column A-2:
7-21
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Step 8: Evaluate the total required area of stirrups, and select spacing:
For strength:
50bw 50 12 in in 2
Minimum required: 0.010
f yt 60,000 psi in
The strength requirement governs here.
If we select #4 stirrups,
Select closed #3 stirrups at 5 in. spacing for the full length of the beam. While in some cases it is
possible that stirrups are not required along the full length of the beam, the torsion in this case is
constant along the length of the beam, as is the shear. Therefore, closed #3 stirrups are required
along the full length of the beam.
yl in
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Minimum required: Al ,min Ph
f yl s f yl
A in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since t 0.0176 0.0050 , we must use 0.0176
s ,min in f yt in in
5 4,000 psi 396 in 2 in 2
Al ,min 0.0176 58 in 1.0 1.07 in 2
60 ksi in
Use Al 1.07 in 2
7-22
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Longitudinal bars are required in the corner of each stirrup. Also, longitudinal bars must be spaced
no more than 12 in apart around the perimeter of the section, so a bar is needed in the middle of
each vertical face. So 6 bars are required.
-At column A-1, use #4 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, As / bar 0.95 in 2 2 0.18 in 2 / 3 1.31 in 2 / 3 0.437 in 2 , so specify 3
#6 bars along the top of the section.
-At midspan, use #4 bars in the top corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, As / bar 1.24 in 2 2 0.18 in 2 / 3 1.60 in 2 / 3 0.53 in 2 , so specify 3
#7 bars along the bottom of the section.
-At column A-2, use #4 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, As / bar 1.34 in 2 2 0.18 in 2 / 3 1.7 in 2 / 3 0.57 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
bars along the top of the section.
7-23
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 8
8-1 Figure P8-1 shows a cantilever beam with containing three No. 7 bars
that are anchored in the column by standard hooks. (normal-
weight) and . If the steel is stressed to at the face of the column,
can these bars:
(a) be anchored by hooks into the column? The clear cover to the side of the
hook is 2 ¾ in. The clear cover to the bar extension beyond the bend is 2 in.
The joint is enclosed by ties at 6 in. o.c.
Except for the side cover of 2 ¾ in., a clear cover of 2 in. is assumed throughout the beam
and joint. See Fig. S8-1 below.
18 in. 48 in.
3 #7
2 in. (clear cover) 7.5 in. 2 in. (clear cover) 2 in.
6 in. 18 in.
Fig. S8-1
8-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Applicable factors:
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(a) applies (factor of 0.7) because:
bar size smaller than bar No. 11
side cover: 2 3/4 in. 2 1/2 in.
tail cover: 2 in. 2 in.
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(b) does not apply because:
tie spacing: 6 in. 3db 2.6 in.
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(d) does not apply because f y 60000 psi
dh hb 0.7 14.8 in. 0.7 10.4 in.
Minimum development length
dh ,min max(8db ,6 in.) max(8 0.875 in., 6 in.) 7 in. 10.4 in. , OK.
Conclusion: The bars can be anchored in the column by using 90˚ standard hook.
(b) be developed in the beam? The bar ends 2 in. from the end of the beam. The
beam has No. 3 double-leg stirrups at 7.5 in.
8-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Bar-spacing factor cb
One-half center-to-center spacing of the bars:
12 in. 2 2 in. 0.875 in.
0.5 1.78 in.
2
Smallest distance from beam surface to centers of bars:
0.875 in.
2 in. 2.44 in.
2
cb min(1.78 in.,2.44 in.) 1.78 in.
Transverse reinforcement index
40 Atr 40 2 0.11 in.
2
8-2 Give two reasons why the tension development length is longer than the
compression development length.
1. A bar stressed in compression transfers some of its force to the concrete by bearing
on the end of the bars.
2. A bar stressed in tension transfers its tensile stress into concrete. As a result the
concrete is cracked and “in-and-out” bond stresses exist. In such a case there are
localized bond stresses which are several times greater the average bond stress. A bar
stressed in compression transfers its stress into concrete which is compressed and
hence un-cracked. There are no “in-and-out” bond stresses in such a case.
8-3 Why do bar spacing and cover to the surface of the bar affect bond strength?
The lugs on deformed bars transfer forces to the concrete. The radial component of these
lug forces causes a tensile stress in an annulus of concrete around the bar. The thicker the
wall of this annulus the lower the tensile stresses are in it. The thickness of the wall is
governed by the minimum distance to the surface of the concrete or to the next bar. Thus,
the larger the cover and bar spacing are, the larger the bond stresses can be developed.
8-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Mn
The question asks to check if d a at the support.
Vu
1. Calculation of d .
Bar-location factor t 1 for bottom bars
Coating factor e 1 for uncoated reinforcement (assumed)
Bar-size factor s 1 for #10 bars
Lightweight-aggregate-concrete factor for light-weight concrete
Bar-spacing factor cb min 2.5 in.,0.5 14 in. 2 2.5 in. 2.5 in.
Transverse reinforcement index K tr .
( )
Mn
2. Calculation of a .
Vu
( ⁄ ) ( ⁄ )
6.5 k/ft 14 ft
Vu 45.5 kips
2
Mn
d a So, the use of 2 #10 bars satisfies ACI Code Section 12.11.3.
Vu
8-5 Why do ACI Section 12.10.3 and 12.12.3 require that bars extend past their cut-
off points?
Inclined cracking due to shear increases the tension in the flexural reinforcement at all
points except the points of maximum moments. As a result, the tensile force in the
flexural reinforcement computed from the moment at a given section actually exists at a
point about 0.75d to d from that point in the direction of decreasing moment.
8-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
8-6 Why does ACI Section 12.10.2 define “points within the span where adjacent
reinforcement terminates” as critical sections for development of reinforcement in
flexural members?
If flexural reinforcement is cut off according to the moment diagram, the flexural cut-off
point is the point in the beam where the remaining steel not cut off is just adequate for the
moment if stressed to f y . Due to the effect of shear, this point actually occurs about d
farther away and hence this point is critical.
4 bars #6 6 bars #6
10 in.
12 in. 11 ft.
øMn = 163
160 k-ft.
k-ft
M = 236 k-ft.
factored moment
k-ft.
diagram M
160 k-ft
flexural
M = 163
cut-off point
cut-off point
12
10 in. 35.6
37 in.in. 21.7in.
21.5 in.
Fig. S8-2
(a) Plot to scale the factored moment diagram. ( ) ( ), where x is
the distance from the support and is the span.
3.9 11 ft
Maximum moment at the midspan: M x / 2 22 ft 11 ft 236 k-ft
2
The factored moment diagram is shown in Fig. S8-2.
8-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(b) Plot a resisting moment diagram and locate the cut-off point for the two cut-
off bars.
a
As f y
6 0.44 in.2 60000 psi
3.3 in.
0.85 f cb 0.85 4000 psi 14 in.
( ) ( ⁄ ) ( ⁄ )
a 3.3 in.
c 3.9 in. ( 1 0.85 for fc 4000 psi )
1 0.85
( )
a
As f y
4 0.44 in.2 60000 psi 2.2 in.
0.85 f cb 0.85 4000 psi 14 in.
( ) ( ⁄ ) ( ⁄ )
a 2.2 in.
c 2.6 in. ( 1 0.85 for fc 4000 psi )
1 0.85
( )
3. Development length for straight bars. ACI Code Section 12.2.2 will be used to
determine the development length.
Minimum clear spacing between bars:
14 in. 2 2.3 in. 5 0.75 in.
1.1 in. db 0.75 in.
5
Since the shear reinforcement is provided such that ACI Code Sections 11.5.4
and 11.5.5.3 will be satisfied, shear reinforcement is not less than the minimum
code requirement.
Bars used are #6
e t f y 1 1 60000
d db 0.75 28.5 in.
25 f c 25 1 4000
8-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Extend the flexural cut-off point a distance d toward the left support to take into
account the shear effect. The distance from the left support to the cut-off point is
8-8 Why does ACI Code Section 12.10.5 require extra stirrups at bar cut-off points in
some cases?
A severe discontinuity in longitudinal bar stresses exists in the region of a cut-off point in
a zone of flexural tension. This causes a reduction in the inclined cracking load in that
region. To compensate, more stirrups are required.
The beam shown in Fig. P8-9 is built of 4000 psi normal-weight concrete and Grade 60 steel.
The effective depth The beam supports a total factored uniform load of 5.25
kips/ft, including its own dead load. The frame is not part of the lateral load-resisting
system for the building. Use Figs. A-1 to A-4 to select cut-off points in Problems 8-9 to 8-11.
8-9 Select cut-off points for span A-B based on the following requirements:
(a) Cut off two No. 6 positive moment bars when no longer needed at each end.
Extend the remaining bars into the columns.
Shear reinforcement:
Av 0.22 in.2 A 50bw 50 12
0.028 in.2 /in. v 0.015 in.2 /in.
s 8 in. s min f yt 40000
(Note that 0.75 fc 47.4 psi 50 psi, use 50 psi )
8-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3. Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger than the
development length.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars is 34 in. from the face of the exterior support.
4. Do the same calculations for the interior support (B) for this exterior span:
After the 2 #6 bars are cutoff, the remaining #7 bars will provide ,
which is 0.577 times at midspan. Therefore, the #6 bars can be cutoff when the
moment demand is less than 0.577 at midspan. From Fig. A-2, this occurs at
from the face of the interior support. The actual cutoff has
to be the larger of and beyond the theoretical cutoff point. and
, so the actual cutoff is from the face of the
interior support.
Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger than the
development length.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars can be 36 in. from the face of the interior
support. To limit the potential for errors on the jobsite, given the very small
difference between exterior and interior support cutoff locations, we will select the
more conservative value for both supports of the exterior span. Cutoff 2 #6 bars at 34
in. from the face of the columns in the exterior span.
6. With the #7 bars extended 6 in. into the columns, verify that the #7 bars are
sufficiently developed. To check this, ensure that the continuous #7 bars extend more
than past the theoretical cutoff point of the #6 bars.
( )
This requirement is satisfied.
Mn
7. Check if d a at the positive moment point of inflection near end A.
Vu
( ⁄ ) ( ⁄ )
8-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end A is
0.1 n 2 ft 24 in.
5.25 k/ft 20 ft
Vu 5.25k/ft 2 ft 42 kips
2
( )
{ }
Mn
8. Check if d
a at the positive moment point of inflection near end B
Vu
Everything remains the same as for end A, except the point of inflection.
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end B is
M
0.104 n 2.08 ft. The change is not significant, so d n a is ensured.
Vu
( ) ( )
Therefore, we must add stirrups near the point of termination for the #6 bars.
Additional stirrup area required is:
(b) Extend all negative moment bars past the negative moment point of
inflection before cutting them off.
The development length is computed following Case 1, with t 1.3 for top bars.
e t f y 1 1.3 60000
#6, top db 0.75 37.0 in.
25 f c
d
25 1 4000
e t f y 1 1.3 60000
#7, top db 0.875 54.0 in.
20 f c
d
20 1 4000
8-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
{ }
⁄
Negative moment point of inflection from face of column A is
0.164 n 3.28 ft = 39.4 in.
Total length from face of column A to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
( ) Choose 58 in.
{ }
⁄
Negative moment point of inflection from face of column B is
0.24 n 4.8 ft = 57.6 in.
Total length from face of column B to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
( ) , so choose 78 in.
(c) Check the anchorage of the negative moment bars at A and modify the bar
size if necessary.
Reinforcement continuity and structural integrity require that all negative moment
reinforcement be fully anchored into column A. Note that the development length of
straight #6 bars is 37.1 in., which far exceeds the available column width of 18 in. A
hook must be used for anchorage.
8-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
,min max(8db ,6 in.) max(8 0.75 in., 6 in.) 6 in. 14.2 in. , OK.
dh
Available horizontal room for the 90º standard hook:
18 in. 2.4 in. 15.6 in. 14.2 in., OK
Extend the hook past the column face and to the other side of the column.
21 in.
6 in. 34 in. 34 in. 6 in.
Fig. S8-3
(a) Cut off two No. 6 positive moment bars when no longer needed at each end.
Extend the remaining bars into the columns.
1. Development length for bottom #6 and #7 bars
From the effective depth of 18.5 in, assume a concrete cover of 2.5 in. to centers of the
bars.
Clear spacing:
Shear reinforcement:
Av 0.22 in.2 A 50bw 50 12
0.028 in.2 /in. v 0.015 in.2 /in.
s 8 in. min
s f yt 40000
(Note that 0.75 fc 47.4 psi 50 psi, use 50 psi )
2. Locate the cutoff point for the #6 bars. Both supports are interior supports.
After the 2 #6 bars are cutoff, the remaining #7 bars will provide ,
which is 0.577 times at midspan. Therefore, the #6 bars can be cutoff when the
moment demand is less than 0.577 at midspan. From Fig. A-1, this occurs at
from the face of the interior support. The actual cutoff has
to be the larger of and beyond the theoretical cutoff point. and
, so the actual cutoff is from the face of the
interior support.
3. Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger than the
development length.
8-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars can be 52 in. from the face of the support.
4. Verify that enough bars are extended into the column:
( )
( )
This requirement is satisfied. Also, specify that the #7 bars extend 6 in. into the
columns.
5. With the #7 bars extended 6 in. into the columns, verify that the #7 bars are
sufficiently developed. To check this, ensure that the continuous #7 bars extend more
than past the theoretical cutoff point of the #6 bars.
( )
This requirement is satisfied.
M
6. Check if d n a at the positive moment point of inflection.
Vu
( ⁄ ) ( ⁄ )
From Fig. A-1, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end A is
( )
{ }
( ) ( )
Therefore, we must add stirrups near the point of termination for the #6 bars.
Additional stirrup area required is:
(b) Extend all negative moment bars past the negative moment point of
inflection before cutting them off.
8-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
1. Similar to Problem 8-9(b), extend all negative reinforcement past the negative
moment point of inflection a length of 18.5 in.
2. Negative moment point of inflection from face of column B and C is
0.24 n 5.04 ft = 60.5 in.
80 in. 80 in.
21 in.
6 in. 52 in. 52 in. 6 in.
Fig. S8-4
8-11 Assume the beam is constructed with 4000 psi light-weight concrete. Select cut-off
points for span A-B based on the following requirements:
(a) Extend all negative moment bars at A past the negative moment point of
inflection.
The development length is computed following Case 1, with t 1.3 for top bars.
( )
√ √
{ }
⁄
Negative moment point of inflection from face of column A is
0.164 n 3.28 ft = 39.4 in.
Total length from face of column A to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
( ) Choose 58 in.
8-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(b) Cut off the two No. 6 positive moment bars when no longer needed at each
end. Extend the remaining bars into the columns.
Shear reinforcement:
Av 0.22 in.2 A 50bw 50 12
0.028 in.2 /in. v 0.015 in.2 /in.
s 8 in. min
s f yt 40000
(Note that 0.75 fc 47.4 psi 50 psi, use 50 psi )
( )
√ √
3. Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger than the
development length.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars is 34 in. from the face of the exterior support.
4. Do the same calculations for the interior support (B) for this exterior span:
After the 2 #6 bars are cutoff, the remaining #7 bars will provide ,
which is 0.577 times at midspan. Therefore, the #6 bars can be cutoff when the
moment demand is less than 0.577 at midspan. From Fig. A-2, this occurs at
from the face of the interior support. The actual cutoff has
to be the larger of and beyond the theoretical cutoff point. and
, so the actual cutoff is from the face of the
interior support.
Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger than the
development length.
8-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars can be 36 in. from the face of the interior
support. To limit the potential for errors on the jobsite, given the very small
difference between exterior and interior support cutoff locations, we will select the
more conservative value for both supports of the exterior span. Cutoff 2 #6 bars at 34
in. from the face of the columns in the exterior span.
6. With the #7 bars extended 6 in. into the columns, verify that the #7 bars are
sufficiently developed. To check this, ensure that the continuous #7 bars extend more
than past the theoretical cutoff point of the #6 bars.
( )
This requirement is satisfied.
Mn
7. Check if d a at the positive moment point of inflection near end A.
Vu
( ⁄ ) ( ⁄ )
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end A is
0.1 n 2 ft 24 in.
5.25 k/ft 20 ft
Vu 5.25k/ft 2 ft 42 kips
2
( )
{ }
Mn
8. Check if d
a at the positive moment point of inflection near end B
Vu
Everything remains the same as for end A, except the point of inflection.
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end B is
M
0.104 n 2.08 ft. The change is not significant, so d n a is ensured.
Vu
9. Check whether ACI Code Section 12.10.5.1 is satisfied.
⁄
⁄
⁄
√ √
( ) ( )
8-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Therefore, we must add stirrups near the point of termination for the #6 bars.
Additional stirrup area required is:
(c) Cut off two of the negative moment bars at B when no longer needed.
Extend the remaining bars past the point of inflection.
No bars are terminated within a flexural tension zone, so there is no need to check
shear at the cut off point.
58
58 in.
in. 78 in.
4#3#3stirrups
@ 5 in.@(extra)
3 in.
4 #6 4#3#3stirrups
@ 5 in.(extra)
@ 3 in. 5 #7
12
21in.
in.
A B
2 #7 2 #6
6 in. Cut-off points for 6 in.
bars #6
240 in.
18 in. 18 in.
8-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Fig. S8-5
8-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 9
9-1 Explain the differences in appearance of flexural cracks, shear cracks, and torsional
cracks.
Flexural cracks are approximately vertical cracks extending from the tensile face of the member
towards the level of the zero-strain axis (neutral axis).
Shear cracks are inclined to the axis of the element. Most often these cracks start at a flexural
crack on the tensile face of the member and extend diagonally through the member toward the
point of maximum moment.
Torsional cracks spiral around the member and, for pure torsion, are roughly 45 deg. on all faces.
For combined torsion and shear, the cracks tend to be pronounced on the face where the direct
shear stress and the shear stresses due to torsion add, and less pronounced (or even absent) on the
opposite face, where the stresses counteract.
9-3 Does the beam shown in Fig. P9-3 satisfy the ACI Code crack control provisions
(Section 10.6.4)? .
40,000 40,000
ACI Code Eq. (10-4) : s 15 2.5cc 12
fs fs
using cc 1.5 in. (3 / 8) in. 1.875 in.
f s 2 f y 2 60,000 psi=40,000 psi ,
3 3
(The value for f s can be also calculated as the stress in the reinforcement closest
to the tension face at service load based on the unfactored moment.)
So,
40,000 40,000
s 15 2.5 1.875 10.3 in.< 12 12 in. OK.
40,000 40,000
1
12 2 1.5 3 1.128
8 2
From Fig. P9-3, bar spacing 2.37 in. < 10.3 in.
3
Thus, the beam satisfies ACI Code Section 10.6.4.
9-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
9-4 Compute the maximum spacing of No. 5 bars in a one-way slab with 1 in. of clear
cover that will satisfy the ACI Code crack-control provisions (Section 10.6.4).
.
40,000 40,000
ACI Code Eq. (10-4) : s 15 2.5cc 12
fs fs
using cc 1.0 in..
f s 2 f y 2 60,000 psi=40,000 psi
3 3
So,
40,000 40,000
s 15 2.5 1.0 12.5 in.> 12 12 in.
40,000 40,000
Thus, the maximum spacing for the No. 5 bars that satisfies ACI Code Section 10.6.4 is 12 in.
9-5 and 9-6 For the cross sections shown in Figs. P9-5 and P9-6, compute:
(a) the gross moment of inertia, ;
(b) the location of the neutral axis of the cracked section and ; and
(c) for .
The beams have a 1.5 in. of clear cover and No. 3 stirrups. The concrete strength is
; .
(b) the location of the neutral axis of the cracked section and ;
The distance from the extreme tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest
1
layer of steel is 1.5 in.+ 3 in.+ 8 in. 2.38 in. Assuming that the spacing between the
8 2 8
centers of the layers is 2 in., find:
4 0.79 2.38 2 0.79 4.38
Centroid = 3.05 in. above bottom and d 20.95 in.
4.74
E 29 106 psi
n s 8.04
Ec 57000 4000 psi
Transformed area of steel = 8.04 6 0.79 38.11 in.2
Compute location of neutral axis
Let depth of neutral axis be c and sum moments about the neutral axis to zero.
Thus, the neutral axis is 7.89 in. below the top of the beam
9-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Compute Icr
(c) for
First calculate M n for the beam:
A f
s y 4.74 60000
c 5.23 in. and c 5.23 6.15 in.
1 '
0.85 f b 0.85 4000 16 0.85
c
d c 20.95 6.15
0.003 0.00722 0.002 O.K.
s c cu 6.15
and 0.005 0.90
t
5.23
4.74 60000 20.95
a 2
M A f d 5214 kips-in.
n s y 2 1000
and M n 0.9 5214 4693 kips-in.
Thus, -
M cr
fr I g
7.5
4000 psi 18432 in.4
728.6 kips-in.
yt lbs
12 in. 1000
kips
So, using Eq. (9-10a) find
( ) [ ( ) ] ( ) [ ( ) ]
3888
ytop 9 in. ybtm 15 in.
432
I g 22032 in.4
9-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(b)
the location of the neutral axis of the cracked section and ;
E 29 106 psi
n s 8.04
Ec 57000 4000 psi
Transformed area of steel = 8.04 4 0.79 25.4 in.2
d 24 in. 2.5 in. 21.5 in.
Thus, the neutral axis is 4.85 in. below the top of the beam (i.e. the compression zone is
rectangular).
Compute Icr
(c) for
First calculate M n for the beam:
A f
s y 3.16 60000
a c 1.55 in. and c 1.55 1.82 in.
1 '
0.85 f b 0.85 4000 36 0.85
c
The steel is yielding and it is a tension-controlled section 0.90 .
1.55
3.16 60000 21.5
a 2
M A f d 3930 kips-in.
n s y 2 1000
and M n 0.9 3930 3537 kips-in.
Thus, -
M cr
fr I g
7.5
4000 psi 22032 in.4
697 kips-in.
yt lbs
15 in. 1000
kips
So, using Eq. (9-10a) find
( ) [ ( ) ] ( ) [ ( ) ]
9-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
1. Deflections greater than 250 of the span are visible and may be unsightly.
2. Excessive deflections may cause cracking of partitions, malfunctioning of doors and windows
and similar damage to non-structural elements.
3. Excessive deflections may interfere with the use of the structure, particularly if the structure
supports machinery that must be carefully aligned.
4. Ponding of water on deflected roofs may overload the roofs.
5. Very large deflections may damage structural members and change the load path.
9-8 A simply supported beam with the cross section shown in Fig. P9-5 has a span of 25
ft and supports an unfactored dead load of 1.5 kips/ft, including its own self-weight
plus an unfactored live load of 1.5 kips/ft. The concrete strength is 4500 psi.
Compute
(a) the immediate dead load deflection.
(b) the immediate dead-plus-live load deflection.
(c) the deflection occurring after partitions are installed. Assume that the
partitions are installed one month after shoring for the beam is removed and
assume that 20 percent of the live load is sustained.
Let depth of neutral axis be c and sum moments about the neutral axis to zero.
Compute Icr
9-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
M cr
3
M 3 728.6
3
728.6 3
Ie I g 1 I cr 1 8738 10087 in.
cr 4
18432
a
a
M M 1406 1406
This is a simply supported beam with distributed loading, so using deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-
13, the immediate dead load deflection can be calculated as:
5 1406 1000 25 12
2 2
5 M pos
iD 0.342 in.
48 EI 48 3.824 106 10087
M D L
3.0 kip ft 252 ft 2 in.
12 2812 kips-in.
8 ft
728.6
3
728.6 3
Ie 18432 1 8738 8907 in.
4
2812 2812
So using again the deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-13, the immediate dead-plus-live-load deflection
can be calculated as:
5 2812 1000 25 12
2
(c)the deflection occurring after partitions are installed. Assume that the
partitions are installed one month after shoring for the beam is removed and
assume that 20 percent of the live load is sustained.
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed can be calculated from Eq. (9-14):
The immediate dead load deflection, iD , was found from part (a) to be 0.342 in. However, after
the live load has been applied and the beam has cracked, the deflection due to dead load will be
increased by an amount equal to the ratio of the I e values used in part (a) and (b). Thus the
immediate dead load deflection on the structure which has been loaded to D+L will be calculated
and used in Eq. (9-14).
10087
iD 0.342 =0.387 in.
8907
9-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Since the beam has no compression reinforcement, and with the partitions installed 1 month after
removal of the shoring,
( )
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed is found as:
9-9 Repeat Problem 9-8 for the beam section in Fig. P9-6.
( ) [ ( ) ] ( ) [ ( ) ]
This is a simply supported beam with distributed loading, so using deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-
13, the immediate dead load deflection can be calculated as:
( )
M D L
3.0 kip ft 252 ft 2 in.
12 2812 kips-in.
8 ft
( ) [ ( ) ]
So using the deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-13, the immediate dead-plus-live-load deflection can
be calculated as:
( )
(c) the deflection occurring after partitions are installed. Assume that the
partitions are installed one month after shoring for the beam is removed and
assume that 20 percent of the live load is sustained.
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed can be calculated from Eq. (9-14):
The immediate dead load deflection, iD , was found from part (a) to be 0.342 in. However, after
the live load has been applied and the beam has cracked, the deflection due to dead load will be
9-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
increased by an amount equal to the ratio of the I e values used in part (a) and (b). Thus the
immediate dead load deflection on the structure which has been loaded to D+L will be calculated
and used in Eq. (9-14).
Since the beam has no compression reinforcement, and with the partitions installed 1 month after
removal of the shoring,
( )
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed is found as:
9-10 The beam shown in Fig. P9-10 is made of 4000-psi concrete and supports unfactored
dead and live loads of 1 kip/ft and 1.1 kips/ft. Compute:
Assume flange width = effective flange width from ACI Code Section 8.12.2. = 72 in.
E 29 106 psi
n s 8.04
Ec 57000 4000 psi
9-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
The moment at the end and the midspan can be calculated using the ACI Moment Coefficients
9-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
10 10
Cracking moments
f r 7.5 4000 psi 474 psi
474 16136
Ends: M cr 110 kips-ft
5.8 12,000
474 16136
Midspan: M cr 45 kips-ft
14.2 12,000
16 16
2
w n 1
1 1.1 22.67 77.1 kips-ft
2
Positive moment at midspan =
14 14
w 2 1
Negative moment at right end = n 1 1.1 22.67 107.9 kips-ft
2
10 10
45
3
45 3
midspan: M a M cr I e 16136 1 4312 6663 in.
4
77.1 77.1
9-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Thus, the weighted average value of I eff using Eq. (9-11a) is:
I e( avg ) 0.70 6663 0.30 16136 9505 in.4
(c) the deflection occurring after partitions are installed. Assume that the
partitions are installed two months after the shoring is removed and
assumed that 15 percent of the live load is sustained.
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed can be calculated from Eq. (9-14):
iL t0 , iD iLS
The immediate dead load deflection, iD , was found from part (a) to be 0.019 in. However, after
the live load has been applied and the beam has cracked, the deflection due to dead load will be
increased by an amount equal to the ratio of the I e values used in part (a) and (b). Thus the
immediate dead load deflection on the structure which has been loaded to D+L will be calculated
and used in Eq. (9-14).
16136
iD 0.019 =0.032 in.
9505
Since the beam has no compression reinforcement at midspan, and with the partitions installed 2
months after removal of the shoring,
( )
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed is found as:
9-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 10
Plan
Assume partitions are not sensitive to deflections. Will require recheck if sensitivity is
established later.
Table A-9:
End bay: Min h n 15 12
7.50 in.
2424
Interior bay: Min h n 15 12 6.43 in.
28 28
Note that slab thickness was chosen on the basis of deflection control, since flexure and shear
probably won’t govern the design (this will be checked later).
Try h 7.0 in. (this may need to be checked for deflections in the end span).
Assuming a cover of 0.75 in. and No. 4 bars as the slab reinforcement,
d 7.0 0.75 0.5 6.0 in.
2
10-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Live load:
Factored load:
Load per foot along design strip
wL 3wD , so we can use the ACI Moment coefficients for the calculation of the positive and the
negative moments.
The maximum value for M u is at the first interior support since n 15 ft. throughout. Using the
appropriate moment coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
( )
For a reinforcing ratio of 0.01 , which is a reasonable upper limit for a slab, the reinforcing
index can be found from Eq. (5-21),
0.01 60000
0.15
4000
From Eq. (5-22) calculate the flexural resistance factor, R.
R 0.15 4000 1 0.59 0.15 547 psi
Using this value of R, the required value of bd 2 can be determined using Eq. (5-23a), assuming
that 0.9 (will check it later).
For , √
Therefore, the minimum d to keep 0.01 is Actual d 6 in. will be less
than 0.01 (O.K. for flexure).
The max shear Vu is at the exterior face of the first interior support. Using the appropriate shear
coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
( √ ) ( √ ) OK
Flexural reinforcement
( ) ( )
10-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Iterate to find the depth of the compression stress block and recompute the value of the required
reinforcement:
Since the depth to the neutral axis, c, is less than 3 8 of d , the section is tension controlled
s
y , 0.9 .
The maximum spacing of the bars is, by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,
3h 21 in.
smax
18 in
Select No. 4 bars at 12 in.
⁄ ⁄
The flexural reinforcement for the supports and the midspan for all the spans is calculated in the
following table.
10-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3. Moment Coef. 1 24 1 14 1 10 1 11 1 16 1 11 1 16
5.
As reqd. in.2 /ft 0.08 0.13 0.19 0.12 0.17 0.12
6.
As,min in.2 /ft 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
#4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @
7. Reinforcement
16 in. 16 in. 12 in. 16 in. 12 in. 16 in.
8.
As provided in.2 /ft 0.15 0.15 0.2 0.15 0.2 0.15
Fig. S10-1.1 shows a cross-section of the slab showing the reinforcement. The bar cut-off points
were located using Fig. A-5(c).
12”
16” 12”
10-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Plan
Assume partitions are not sensitive to deflections. Will require recheck if sensitivity is established
later.
Table A-9:
End bay: Min h n 13 12
6.50 in.
24 24
Interior bay: Min h n 15 12 6.43 in.
28 28
Note that slab thickness is chosen on basis of deflection control, since flexure and shear probably
won’t govern the design (will be checked later).
Assuming a cover of 0.75 in. and No. 4 bars as the slab reinforcement,
d 6.5 0.75 0.5 5.5 in.
2
10-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
wL 3wD , so we can use the ACI Moment coefficients for the calculation of the positive and the
negative moments (ACI Code Section 8.3.3).
( )
For a reinforcing ratio of 0.01 , which is a reasonable upper limit for a slab, the reinforcing
index can be found from Eq. (5-21),
0.01 60000
0.171
3500
From Eq. (5-22) calculate the flexural resistance factor, R.
R 0.171 3500 1 0.59 0.171 538 psi
Using this value of R, the required value of bd 2 can be determined using Eq. (5-23a), assuming
that 0.9 (will check it later).
For , √
i.e., min d to keep 0.01 is Actual d 5.5 in. will be less than 0.01 (O.K. for
flexure).
The max shear Vu will occur in one of the two locations discussed for the maximum moments.
Using the appropriate shear coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
10-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Vc 0.75 2 fc' bw d 0.75 2 3500 12 5.5 5860 lbs/ft ok for shear
Flexural reinforcement
Max -
a
Assuming that d 0.95d and s y , find the required reinforcement for a 1-ft wide strip
2
of slab.
( ) ( )
Iterate to find the depth of the compression stress block and recompute the value of the required
reinforcement:
Since the depth to the neutral axis, c, is less than 3 8 of d , the section is tension controlled
s
y , 0.9 .
The maximum spacing of the bars is, by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,
3h 19.5 in.
smax
18 in
The flexural reinforcement for the supports and the midspan for all the spans is calculated in the
following table.
10-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
2. wu n
2
kips-ft 47.7 47.7 55.3 63.5 63.5 63.5
3. Moment Coef. 1 24 1 14 1 10 1 11 1 16 1 11 1 16
6.
As,min in.2 /ft 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14
#4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @
7. Reinforcement
16 in. 16 in. 9 in. 11 in. 9 in. 11 in.
8. As provided in.2 /ft 0.15 0.15 0.27 0.18 0.27 0.18
Fig. S10-2.1 shows a cross-section of the slab showing the reinforcement. The bar cut-off points
were located using Fig. A-5(c).
9”
16” 11”
10-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
10-3 A three span continuous beam supports 6-in.-thick one-way slabs that span 20 ft
center-to-center of beams. The beams have clear spans, face-to-face of 16-in.-square
columns, of 27, 30, and 27 ft. The floor supports ceiling, ductwork, and lighting
fixtures weighing a total of 8 psf, ceramic floor tile weighting 16 psf, partitions
equivalent to a uniform deal load of 20 psf, and a live load of 100 psf. Design the
beam, using . Use for flexural reinforcement and
for shear reinforcement. Calculate cut-off points, extending all
reinforcement past points of inflection. Draw an elevation view of the beam and
enough cross-sections to summarize the design.
6 in.
slab self-weight: 150 pcf 75 psf
12 in.
ft.
ceiling, tile, partitions: 8 psf 16 psf 20 psf 44 psf
The beam size is not known at this stage, so it must be estimated for preliminary design purposes.
Once the size of the beam has been established, the factored load will be corrected and then used
in subsequent calculations. The beam size will be estimated in step 2.
The ASCE/SEI 7-10 recommendations allow live-load reductions based on tributary area
multiplied by a live-load element factor, LL 2 , to convert the tributary area to an influence
area.
10-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Note that L shall not be less than 0.50 Lo for members supporting one floor (O.K.)
The size of the beam will be chosen on the basis of negative moment at the first interior support.
For this location, the factored load on the beam, not including the beam stem below the slab, is:
wu 1.2 75 44 1.6 61.3 241 psf
The tributary width for the beam is 15 ft and the factored load from the slab per foot of beam is
241 psf 15 ft. 3,615 lbs 3.6 kips
ft ft
Two approximate methods can be used to estimate the weight of the beam stem:
(a) the factored dead load of the stem is taken as 12 to 20 percent of the other factored loads
on the beam. This gives 0.43 to 0.72 kip/ft.
(b) the overall depth of beam h is taken to be 1/18 to 1/12 of the larger span, , and bw is
taken to be 0.5h . This gives the overall h as 20 to 30 in., with the stem extending 14 to 24 in.
below the slab, and gives bw as 10 to 15 in. The factored load of such sizes ranges from 0.17 to
0.45 kip/ft.
As a first trial, assume the factored weight of the stem to be 0.50 kip/ft. Then, total trial load per
foot 3.6 0.5 4.1 kip/ft
ACI Table 9.5(a) (Table A-9) gives the minimum depths, unless deflections are checked. For
partitions flexible enough to undergo some deflection, minimum depth for beam BC is
16 in.
hmin , where the span center-to-center of supports 27 ft 28.3 ft
18.5 12 in.
ft
28.3 12
Thus, hmin 18.4 in.
18.5
10-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(b) Determine the minimum depth based on the negative moment at the exterior face of the
first interior support.
The beam fits the requirements in ACI Code Section 8.3.3 and can use the moment and shear
coefficients. For the support at B,
w 2 4.1 28.5
2
Mu u n 333 kips-ft
10 10
27 ft 30 ft
where n 28.5 ft (the average of the two adjacent spans).
2
Using the procedure developed in Chapter 5 for the design of singly reinforced beam sections, the
reinforcement ratio that will result in a tension-controlled section can be estimated from
Eq. (5-18) as,
f ' 0.825 4.5
initial 1 c 0.0155
4 fy 4 60
For this reinforcement ratio, use Eq. (5-21), to find the reinforcing index,
0.0155 60
0.207
4.5
From Eq. (5-22) calculate the flexural resistance factor, R.
R 0.207 4500 1 0.59 0.207 818 psi
Using this value of R, the required value of bd 2 can be determined using Eq. (5-23a), assuming
that 0.9 (will check it later).
333
bd 2 12,000 5430 in.3
0.9 818
Since columns are 16 in., try a 14 or 16 in. wide stem. Let’s try b 14 in.
5428
Then, d 19.7 in. d 21.5 in.
14
With one layer of steel at supports, h 21.5 2.5 24 in. (O.K. for deflections).
So, try a 14-in. wide-by-24-in. beam.
Thus, Vn 0.75 40.4 161 151 kips (O.K. for shear)
10-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(d) Summary
b 14 in.
Use : h 24 in. 18 in. below slab
d 21.5 in.,assuming one layer of steel
3. Compute the dead load of the stem, and recompute the total load per foot.
18 14
Weight per foot of the stem below slab 0.15 0.26 kip/ft
144
Corrected total factored load for 1st internal support moment: 3.6 1.2 0.26 3.9 kip/ft
Since this is less that the 4.1 kip/ft used earlier to estimate the beam size, the section chosen will
be adequate.
0.25 n based on the shorter span for simplicity 0.25 27 12 in. 81 in.
be bw 2 8 6 14 2 8 6 110 in.
15 12 180 in.
Therefore, the effective flange width is 81 in. and shown in Fig. S10-3.1
10-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Cm 1 1 1 and 1 1
16 14 10 11 16
M u Cm wu 2
n ,kips-ft -200 230 -325 242
Iterate to find the depth of the compression stress block and recompute the value of the required
As f y 3.73 60000
reinforcement: a 4.18 in., c 4.18 5.07 in.
0.85 fc b 0.85 4500 14
' 0.825
10-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Since the depth to the neutral axis, c, is less than 3 8 of d , clearly the section is tension
controlled s y , 0.9 , and
325 12,000
As ,red 3.72 in.2
4.18
0.90 60,000 21.5
2
The other negative moment sections have a lower design moment, so it will be conservative to
use the ratio of As obtained here to quickly determine the area of tension steel required at
Mu
those other locations. That ratio is
As
3.72 in.2
M u 325 kips-ft
0.0114 in.2 /kips-ft (eq. A)
Because the beam acts as a T-shape beam with compression in the top flange, assume that the
a
compression zone is rectangular, i.e. a h f 6 in. , use d 0.95d .For s y and =0.9 ,
2
the required reinforcement that section is,
Iterate to find the depth of the compression stress block and recompute the value of the required
reinforcement:
As f y 2.63 60000
a 0.51 in., c 0.51 0.62 in.
0.85 fc be 0.85 4500 81
' 0.825
The section is tension controlled s y , 0.9 , and doing one iteration for the negative
moment section results in As 2.53 in.2
The other positive moment section has a lower design moment, so it will be conservative to use
the ratio of As obtained here to quickly determine the area of tension steel required at those
Mu
other locations. That ratio is
As
2.53 in.2
M u 242 kips-ft
0.0104 in.2 /kips-ft (eq. B)
10-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3 f c' 200bw d
From ACI Code Section 10.5.1, As ,min bw d and .
fy fy
For 4500 psi concrete, 3 fc' 201 psi , thus
3 4500
As ,min 14 21.5=1.0 in.2
60,000
Note that in the negative moment regions some of the bars can be placed in the slab besides the
beam and it is not necessary to check whether they will fit into the web width.
10-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
14 2 1.5 0.375 7
Bar spacing 8 3.1 in. <10.3 in. OK.
3
It was also clear that the bar spacing is smaller than 10.3 in., since there are four bars and
bw 14 in.
ACI Code Section 10.6.6 says “part” of the negative moment steel shall be distributed over a
width equal to the smaller of the effective flange width (81 in.) and n 10 34.2 in. At the
interior supports, there are 6 top bars. Place the two No. 8 bars at the corners of the stirrups, two
No. 7 bars over the beam web, and the other two No. 7 bars in the slab. Within a width of 34.2
in. we must place six bars. These cannot be further apart than 10.3 in. (as calculated in part a).
We shall arbitrarily place two bars at 5 in. outside the web of the beam.
ACI Code Section 10.6.6 requires “some” longitudinal reinforcement in the slab outside this
band. We shall assume that the shrinkage and temperature steel in the slab will satisfy this
requirement.
The shear force diagrams are calculated in the following table and shown at the bottom of the
table. The shear coefficients for the supports are from ACI Code Section 8.3.3 and the coefficient
fro the midspan of the beam is based on Eq. (6-26).
n ,ft 27 30
wu ,kips/ft 4.4 4.3
wLu ,kips/ft 1.9 1.8
Cv at support and
1.0 0.125 1.15 1.0 0.125 1.0
midpsan
wu n 2 59.4 59.4 64.5 64.5
wLu n 51.3 54
Vu , kips 59.4 6.4 68.3 64.5 6.7 64.5
Vn Vu 79.2 8.5 91.1 86.0 8.9 86.0
10-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Because the beam is supported by a column, the critical section is located at d away from the face
of the support.
To satisfy the minimum stirrup requirement in ACI Code Section 11.4.6.3, the stirrup spacing
must be,
Av f yt 0.22 40,000
smax 12.6 in.
50bw 50 14
Note that 0.75 4500 50.3 psi > 50 psi, so use 50 psi in ACI Code Eq. (11-13) .
The spacing required to support the shear force at the support is,
0.22 40 21.5
s 6.45 in.-say 6 in. on centers
69.8 40.4
Vu 0.22 40 21.5
We can change the stirrup spacing to 10.5 in. when 40.4 58.4 kips
10.5
This occurs at about 4 ft from face of support A.
V V
We can stop the stirrups when u c x 11.3 ft from face of support A.
2
Place the first stirrup at 3 in. from support A, then 9 stirrups at 6 in. and 9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
10-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Place the first stirrup at 2 in. from support B, then 15 stirrups at 4.5 in. and 9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
Place the first stirrup at 2.5 in. from support B, then 14 stirrups at 4.5 in. and 9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
d 21.5 in.
(a) Detailing requirements: 12db 12 in. for No. 8 bar
n
20.25 in. for 27 ft span, 22.5 in. for 30 ft span
16
n n
Thus, d exceeds 12db and for AB span, while governs for span BC.
16 16
The bottom and top bars have clear spacing and cover of at least d b and are enclosed by at least
minimum stirrups. Therefore, this is Case 1 in Table 8-1 (ACI Code Section 12.2.2).
10-18
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Span AB
4 No. 7-Extend 2 full length into each support, cut off the other two at the positive moment point
of inflection so that extra stirrups are not required.
Exterior end: From Fig. A-2, inflection point at 0.10 27 12 32.4 in. from face of column.
Rule 3-a - Extend d 21.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point, i.e. 32.4 in.-21.5 in = 10.9 in. from
face of column at A. Say 10 in.
Rule 4-a - Distance from midspan to cutoff point greater than d .
Rule 1-b - This is an interior beam with open stirrups. Since this is a discontinuous end use 90
deg. standard hooks on 2 No. 7 bars.
Rule 4-d – At the inflection point, the remaining steel is two No. 7, As 1.2 in.2 Thus,
1.2 60
a 1.57 in.
0.85 4.5 12
1.57
M n 1.2 60 21.5
2
=1490 kip-in=124 kip-ft
The shear at 32.4 in. from the exterior end is,
32.4
Vu 5.24 79.2 65 kips
12
a 21.5 in.
M 1490
Thus, n a 21.5 44.4 in.
Vu 65
This exceeds d - therefore, OK.
Interior end: From Fig. A-2, inflection point at 0.104 27 12 33.7 in. from face of column
Rule 3-a - Extend bars to 33.7 in.- 21.5 in. = 12.2 in. from face of column. Use 10 in. to match
other end.
Rule 4-a - Satisfied
Rule 1-b - This is an interior beam with open stirrups. Rule 1-b applies. Lap splice 2#7 bars from
the exterior span with 2 No. 7 bars from the interior span with a Class A tension lap splice
1.0 39.1 in. 3 ft - 2 in.
Rule 4-d
M n 1490 kip-in=124 kip-ft
The shear at 33.7 in. from the exterior end is,
33.7
Vu 6.12 91.1 73.9 kips
12
a 21.5 in.
M 1490
Thus, n a 21.5 41.7 in.
Vu 73.9
This exceeds d - therefore, OK.
10-19
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Span BC
2 No. 8 and 3 No. 7 at midspan – Extend 2 No. 7 into supports. Cutoff 2 No. 8 and 1 No. 7 bars at
the positive moment point of inflection so that extra stirrups are not required. Inflection point at
0.146 30 12 52.6 in. from face of column
Rule 3-a - Extend n
22.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point, i.e. 52.6 in.-22.5 in. = 30.1 in.
16
from face of column. Say 30 in.
Rule 4-a - Satisfied.
Rule 1-b – Lap splice 2#7 bars 3 ft - 2 in at support
Rule 4-d
M n 2650 kip-in=221 kip-ft
The shear at 52.6 in. from the exterior end is,
52.6
Vu 5.14 86 63.5 kips
12
a 21.5 in.
M 2650
Thus, n a 21.5 63.3 in.
Vu 63.5
This exceeds d - therefore, OK.
Since all cutoffs are past points of inflection, they are not in zones of flexural tension, therefore
extra stirrups are not needed.
Provide 2 No. 4 top bars as stirrup support, lab splice with negative moment steel.
10-20
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
10-21
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
10-4 Repeat Problem 10-3, but cut off up to 50 percent of the negative- and positive-
moment bars in each span where they are no longer required.
Extend two bars full length and into each support, cutoff the other two where they no longer
required 50% of M u .
From Fig. A-2, flexural cutoff point is at 0.21 n 0.21 27 12 68 in. from exterior end
(support A), and 0.22 n 0.22 27 12 71 in. from interior end (support B).
Rule 3-a: Extend d 21.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point
68 in. 21.5 in. 46.5 in. from exterior end
71 in. 21.5 in. 49.5 in. from interior end
BC span
From Fig. A-1, flexural cutoff point is at 0.1 n 0.1 30 12 36 in.
Rule 3-b: Extend d 22.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point
36 in.+ 22.5 in. 58.5 in.
Rule 4-b: d for #7 top bar 39.1 in.< 58.5 in.
Therefore, use 58.5 in. for cutoff point.
10-22
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 11
11-1 The column shown in Fig. P11-1 is made of 4000 psi concrete and Grade-60 steel.
a) Compute the theoretical capacity of the column for pure axial load.
First compute the gross area of the section, and the area of steel in the column.
Ag 18 in 18 in 324 in 2
Ast 6 Ab 6 1.0 in 2 6 in 2
Now we can compute the theoretical capacity of the column.
Po 0.85 f 'c Ag Ast f y A st 0.85 4 ksi 324 in 2 6 in 2 60 ksi 6 in 2 1440 k
As any column is loaded, and thus shortened, the concrete will expand laterally. When this
expansion occurs, transverse reinforcement is engaged and will tend to react against any further
expansion of the concrete within the core. This results in a state of tri-axial compression within the
core of the column, which significantly improves both strength and ductility.
The circular spiral is much more effective than tied reinforcement at confining this
expansion for two reasons. First, spirals are often spaced more closely together than tied stirrups,
so the confinement is more uniformly applied to the core. Second, the confinement stresses are
transformed directly into hoop stresses in the spiral, which is a much more efficient mechanism for
reacting to the core’s expansion than the straight legs of tied stirrups can provide (see section 11-2).
Even when columns are subjected to axial loads, reinforcing bars can still often be stressed
in tension when moments are concurrently applied to the section. When this is the case, tension
splices (either Class A or Class B) are required for those bars expected to be resisting tension.
However, since it is most practical from a construction standpoint to use the same length of lap
splices on all bars within a section, all splices should be specified as tension splices when some of
the bars are expected to be in tension.
11-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
11-4 Compute the balanced axial load and moment capacity of the column shown in
Fig. P11-1. Use and .
Assume bending around an axis parallel to the two layers of steel. To calculate the
balanced point of the interaction diagram, set the extreme compression fiber strain to c 0.003 and
the extreme steel tensile strain to y f y / E 60 ksi / 29,000 ksi 0.00207 .
Now we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point:
Pn Cc Fs 2 Fs1 479 k 170 k 180 k 469 k
h a h h
M n Cc Fs1 d Fs 2 d '
2 2 2 2
18 in 7.83 in 18 in 18 in
M n 479 k 180 k 15.56 in 170 k 2.44 in
2 2 2 2
M n 4730 k-in 394 k-ft
11-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
11-5 For the column shown in Fig. P11-5, use a strain-compatibility solution to compute
five points on the interaction diagram corresponding to points 1 to 5 in Fig. 11-22.
Plot the interaction diagram. Use and .
Begin by calculating the depth and area of each layer of steel, and other constants.
d1 18 in 1.5 in 0.375 in 1.128 in / 2 15.56 in
A1 3 Ab 3 1.0 in 2 3.0 in 2
d2 h / 2 18 in / 2 9.0 in A2 2 Ab 2 1.0 in 2 2.0 in 2
d3 1.5 in 0.375 in 1.128 in / 2 2.44 in A3 3 Ab 3 1.0 in 2 3.0 in 2
Ag hb 18 in 18 in 324 in 2 Ast 8 Ab 8 1.0 in 2 8.0 in 2
1 0.80
11-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
11-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Now we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point.
Pn Cc Fs1 Fs 2 Fs 3 564 k 180 k 3.96 k 167 k 555 k
h a h h h
M n Cc Fs1 d1 Fs 2 d 2 Fs1 d3
2 2 2 2 2
7.37 in
M n 564 k 9 in 180 k 9 in 15.56 in 3.96 k 9 in 9 in 167 k 9 in 2.44 in
2
M n 5280 k-in 440 k-ft
Now we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point.
Pn Cc Fs1 Fs 2 Fs 3 357 k 180 k 94.2 k 140 k 223 k
h a h h h
M n Cc Fs1 d1 Fs 2 d 2 Fs1 d3
2 2 2 2 2
11-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4.67 in
M n 357 k 9 in 180 k 9 in 15.56 in 94.2 k 9 in 9 in 140 k 9 in 2.44 in
2
M n 4480 k-in 373 k-ft
And, since the section is in pure tension, it is tension controlled, and 0.9 .
Pn 0.9 480 k 432 k
M n 0.9 0 k-ft 0 k-ft
2000
1500
Axial Load (kip)
1000
500
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Moment (k-ft)
-500
Fig. S11-4
11-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
11-6 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to compute the maximum moment, Mu,
that can be supported by the column shown in Fig. P11-1 if (Use and
):
11-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(c) e = 4 in.
11-7 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to select tied-column cross sections to
support the loads given in the accompanying list. In each case, use and
. Design the ties and calculate the required splice lengths, assuming
that the bars extending up from the column below are the same diameter as in the
column you have designed. Draw a typical cross section of the column showing the
bars and ties.
(a) Pu = 390 kips, Mu = 220 k-ft, square column with bars in two faces.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, assume g 0.02 .
Pu 390 k
Ag ,trial 188 in 2 13.7 in 13.7 in
0.40 f 'c f y g 0.40 4 ksi 60 ksi 0.02
So try a 14 in square column, assuming #3 stirrups and #8 bars.
Then calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
14 in 2 1.5 in 0.375 in 0.5 in
0.66
14 in
Pn Pu 390 k
1.99 ksi
bh bh 14 in 14 in
11-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section:
As ,required 0.017bh 0.017 18 in 18 in 5.51 in 2
As indicated on the interaction diagrams, f s 0.5 f y in the extreme tensile layer of steel. Therefore,
Class B tension splices are required. From Table A-13, the splice length must be 54 in.
As transverse reinforcement we are permitted to use #3 bars since the longitudinal bars are not
larger than #10s. Now select the vertical spacing of the ties:
16d b 16 0.875 in 14 in
s 48dbt 48 0.375 in 18 in
min(b, h) min(18 in,18 in) 18 in
Select #3 stirrups spaced at 14 in o.c.
11-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Fig. S11-7a
(b) Pu = 710 kips, Mu = 50 k-ft, square column with bars in four faces.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, set g 0.02 :
Pu 710 k
Ag ,trial 341 in 2 18.5 in 18.5 in
0.40 f 'c f y g 0.40 4 ksi 60 ksi 0.02
So try a 20 in square column, assuming #3 stirrups and #8 bars.
Then calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
20 in 2 1.5 in 0.375 in 0.5 in
0.76
20 in
Pn Pu 710 k
1.78 ksi
bh bh 20 in 20 in
M n M u 50 k-ft 12 in/ft
2 0.075 ksi
20 in 20 in
2
bh2 bh
From Figs. A-9a and A-9b, the section would require g 0.01 , so a smaller section
would be desirable. Try a square column with 18 in sides.
Re-calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
18 in 2 1.5 in 0.375 in 0.5 in
0.736
18 in
Pn Pu 710k
2.19 ksi
bh bh 18 in 18 in
M n M u 50 k-ft 12 in/ft
2 0.103 ksi
18 in 18 in
2
bh2 bh
From Fig. A-9a: g 0.016 for 0.60
From Fig. A-9b: g 0.015 for 0.75
By interpolation for 0.736 , g 0.015
11-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section:
As ,required 0.015bh 0.015 18 in 18 in 4.86 in 2
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is under compression. Therefore,
from Table A-13, a splice of length 0.83 23 in 19.1 in 20 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected #3 bars since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the vertical spacing of the ties:
16d b 16 0.75 in 12 in
s 48dbt 48 0.375 in 18 in
min(b, h) min(18 in,18 in) 18 in
Fig. S11-7b
(c) Pu = 200 kips, Mu = 240 k-ft, square column with bars in four faces.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, set g 0.02 :
( ) ( )
However, since the moment is relatively high, try a 16 in square column, assuming #3
stirrups and #8 bars.
Then calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
11-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Re-calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
18 in 2 1.5 in 0.375 in 0.5 in
0.736
18 in
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section:
From the interaction diagrams, f s 0.5 f y in the extreme tensile layer of steel. Therefore, Class B
tension splices are required. From Table A-13, the splice length must be 62 in.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected #3 bars since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the vertical spacing of the ties:
16d b 16 1.00 in 16 in
s 48dbt 48 0.375 in 18 in
min(b, h) min(18 in,18 in) 18 in
11-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Fig. S11-7c
11-8 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to select spiral-column cross sections to
support the loads given in the accompanying list. In each case, use and
. Design the spirals and calculate the required splice lengths. Draw a
typical cross section of the column showing the bars and spiral.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, set g 0.02 .
Pu 600 k
Ag ,trial 194 in 2 15.7 in dia.
0.50 f 'c f y g 0.50 5 ksi 60 ksi 0.02
Try a 16 in diameter column, assuming #3 spiral and #8 bars.
Then calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
16 in 2 1.5 in 0.375 in 0.5 in
0.703
16 in
Pn Pu 600 k
2.99 ksi
Ag Ag 201 in 2
Mn M u 65 k-ft 12 in/ft
0.243 ksi
hAg hAg 16 in 201 in 2
From Fig. A-13a: g 0.015 for 0.60
From Fig. A-13b: g 0.012 for 0.75
By interpolation for 0.703 , g 0.013
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section:
11-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
16 in 2.61 in 2
2
d2
As ,required 0.013 0.013
4 4
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is under compression. Therefore,
from Table A-13, a splice of length 0.75 23 in 17.3 in 18 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected a #3 spiral since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the pitch of the spiral:
3 in
d sp 2 f yt 0.375 in 60 ksi
2
s
0.45D f ' A / A 1 0.45 13 in 5 ksi 201 in 2 / 134 in 2 1 1.81 in
c c g ch
Use a 16 in diameter column reinforced with 6 #6 bars. Use 18 in lap splices, and #3
spirals with a pitch of 1.75 in as transverse reinforcement.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, set g 0.02 :
( ) ( )
Since there is also a moment applied, try an 18 in diameter column, assuming #3 spiral and
#8 bars.
Then calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
18 in 2 1.5 in 0.375 in 0.5 in
0.736
18 in
Pn Pu 200
2
0.79 ksi
Ag Ag 18
2
Mn M u 150 k-ft 12 in/ft
0.394 ksi
hAg hAg 18 in 254 in 2
From Fig. A-13a: g 0.016 for 0.60
From Fig. A-13b: g 0.012 for 0.75
By interpolation for 0.74 , g 0.012
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section:
18 in 3.05 in 2
2
d2
As ,required 0.012 0.012
4 4
11-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is in tension, but only requires a
Class A splice as long as not all of the bars are spliced at the same location. Since, in reality, it is
likely that all bars will be spliced in the same plane, specify a Class B splice regardless. Therefore,
from Table A-13, a splice of length 33 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected a #3 spiral since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the pitch of the spiral:
3 in
d sp 2 f yt 0.375 in 60 ksi
2
s
0.45D f ' A / A 1 0.45 15 in 5 ksi 254 in 2 / 177 in 2 1 1.81 in
c c g ch
Use an 18 in diameter column reinforced with 8 #6 bars. Use 33 in lap splices, and #3 spirals with
a pitch of 1.75 in as transverse reinforcement.
11-9 Design a cross section and reinforcement to supports Pu = 450 kips, Mux = 100 k-ft,
and Muy = 130 k-ft. Use and .
Although the strain compatibility method (shown in example 11-5) is the most
theoretically correct method for designing columns for biaxial loading, it is seldom used in design.
Here we will use two more common methods for designing a column, the equivalent eccentricity
method and the Bresler reciprocal load method. Any method outlined in section 11-7 is
appropriate for the solution to this problem.
11-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
ex ey
Since our trial section is square,
x y
Pu 450 k
0.347 0.4
f 'c Ag 4 ksi 18 in 2
Pu f y 40,000 psi
0.5
f 'c Ag 100,000 psi
450 k 60,000 psi 40,000 psi
0.5 0.847
2
4 ksi 18 in
100,000 psi
ey x 0.847 2.67 in 18 in
eox ex 3.47 in 5.73 in
y 18 in
We can check this solution using the Bresler reciprocal load method. Remember that we have an
18 in square column reinforced with 8 #9 bars.
A 8 in 2
g st 0.0247
Ag 324 in 2
18 in 2 1.5 in 0.375 in 0.56 in
0.73
18 in
Compute Pnx , the factored load capacity corresponding to ex and g .
M uy 130 k-ft 12 in/ft e 3.47 in
ex 3.47 in , and x 0.193 .
Pu 450 k x 18 in
Pnx
From Fig. A-9b, 1.9 ksi
bh
Therefore Pnx 616 k
Compute Pny , the factored load capacity corresponding to ey and g .
11-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
11-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 12
12-1 A hinged end column 18-ft tall supports unfactored loads of 100 kips dead load and
60 kips live load. These loads are applied at an eccentricity of 3 in. at bottom and 5
in. at the top. Both eccentricities are on the same side of the centerline of the
column. Design a tied column with at least three bars per face using
and .
Compute EI
0.4 Ec I g
EI
1 d
Ec 57,000 4000 3605 103 psi
16 in.
4
Ig 5460 in.4
12
factored dead load 1.2 100 kips
d 0.56
all factored load 216 kips
12-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Magnified moment
M c ns M 2
Cm
ns 1.0
P
1 u
Pc
M1
Cm 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.84
M2
2 EI 2 5.05 109 lb-in.2
Pc 1070 103 lb =1070 kips
k 1.0 18 12 in.
2 2 2
0.84
ns 1.15
216 kips
1
0.75 1070 kips
Select reinforcement
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for the ties, and a clear concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
16 in. 2 1.5 in. 2 0.375 in. 1 in.
0.70
16 in.
Pn Pu 216 kips
0.84 ksi
bh bh (16 in.)2
12-2 Repeat Problem 12-1, but with the top eccentricity to the right of the centerline and
the bottom eccentricity to the left.
12-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Compute EI
0.4 Ec I g
EI
1 d
Ec 3605 103 psi
14 in.
4
Ig 3200 in.4
12
d 0.56
0.4 3605 103 psi 3200 in.4
EI 2.96 109 lb-in.2
1 0.56
Magnified moment
M c ns M 2
Cm
ns 1.0
P
1 u
Pc
M1
Cm 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 (0.6) 0.36
M2
2 EI 2 2.96 109 lb-in.2
Pcr 626 103 lb =626 kips
k 1.0 18 12 in.
2 2 2
0.36
ns 0.67 1, use ns 1
216 kips
1
0.75 626 kips
12-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Select reinforcement
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for ties, and a clear concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
14 in. 2 1.5 in. 2 0.375 in. 1 in.
0.66
14 in.
Pn Pu 216 kips
1.10 ksi
bh bh (14 in.)2
12-3 Figure P12-3 shows an exterior column in a multistory frame. The dimensions are
center-to-center of the joints. The beams are 12 in. wide by 18 in. in over-all depth.
The floor slab is 6 in. thick. The building includes a service core which resists the
majority of the lateral loads. Use f c = 5000 psi and f y = 60,000 psi. The loads and
moments on column AB are:
Design column A-B using a square cross section with at least three bars per face.
Since the building has a service core which resists the majority of the lateral loads, the
frame is braced, or non-sway.
| |
12-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
22 ft
12 ft
24 ft
12 ft
D
Fig. P12-3
( ) ( )
Choose a column cross section of 16 in. x 16 in.
( ) ( )
k
50.6 > 42.5
u
r
Column is slender.
12-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Compute k
Assume the columns CA and BD also have a cross section of 16 in. x 16 in.
16 in.
4
EI 3820 Ec
13.3Ec
c AB 12 24
EI 4080 Ec
15.5Ec
b beams 12 22
26.5Ec 13.3Ec
top joint 2.57 bottom joint
15.5Ec
From nomograph, read k 0.87
Compute EI
Ec I g
EI
2.5(1 d )
Ec 57,000 5000 4030 103 psi
I g 5460 in.4
260
d 0.57
460
4030 103 psi 5460 in.4
EI 5.61 109 lb-in.2
2.5 (1 0.57)
Magnified moment
M c ns M 2
Cm
ns 1.0
P
1 u
Pc
M1
Cm 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 (0.71) 0.32
M2
2 EI 2 5.61 109 lb-in.2
Pc 1000 103 lb =1000 kips
k 0.87 270 in.
2 2
u
0.32
ns 0.83 1, use ns 1
460 kips
1
0.75 1000 kips
12-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Select reinforcement
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for ties, and a clear concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
16 in. 2 1.5 in. 2 0.375 in. 1 in.
0.70
16 in.
12-4 Use the ACI moment-magnifier method to redesign the columns in the main floor of
Example 12-3 assuming that the floor-to-floor height of the first story is 16 ft 0 in.
rather than 18 ft 0 in. Also, assume the lateral wind forces are 15 percent larger
than those used in Example 12-3.
The following design shall be performed for a typical interior frame, for instance the fram
along line 2. The design of the columns will follow the following steps:
A. Calculate loads
B. Calculate the beam and column properties and modulus of elasticity
C. Select preliminary column size
D. Check with gravity load case
E. Check with gravity plus wind load case
F. Finalize the design of column reinforcement
12-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
20'
20'
a) Plan
20'
1 1
3
20'
N
2
20'
1
32' 30' 32'
A B C D
Roof
11' 6"
5 th floor
11' 6"
4 th floor
11' 6"
3 th floor
b) Section 1-1
11' 6"
2 th floor
16' 0"
Ground
floor
11' 6"
Slab thickness: 6"; Column size: 18" x 18"; Beam size: 18" x 30"
Fig. S12-1
12-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
For each column of 11.5 ft, a weight of 3.88 kips is added for the column self-weight.
For each column of 16.0 ft, a weight of 5.40 kips is added for the column self-weight.
12-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Beam:
Effective flange width
18 in. 8 6 in. 66 in.
A 6 66 18 24 828 in 2
18 in. 30 in.
3
Columns are sized based on the gravity load 1.2D 1.6L 0.5Lr . In this load combination, live
load can be reduced. From separate analyses of dead load, live load from the roof floor, and live
load from the other floors, the axial loads of the columns in the ground floor are shown in the
Table P12-1.
The axial load in the exterior column from the live load from the other floors then can be reduced
with a reduction factor as follows:
15
0.25 0.46
4 4 16.75 20
The axial load in the interior column from the live load from the other floors then can be reduced
with a reduction factor as follows:
15
0.25 0.40
4 4 31 20
The calculation of reduced axial live load and factored load is shown in Table P12-1.
Table P12-1
Exterior Interior
All unit are in kips column column
Dead load 285 487
Live load from the roof floor 10.0 18.5
Live load from the other floors 107 198
Reduced live load from the other floors 48.8 79.2
Total factored load 425 720
Assume g 0.015
Exterior column
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
12-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Interior column
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
Based on the result of Example 12-3, select a column cross section of 18 in. 18 in.
( Ag 324 in.2 ) for both exterior and interior columns.
1. Is the story being designed sway or non-sway? In order to answer this question, we need
P
to calculate the stability index Q u oh .In order to have the terms from the same
Vus c
analysis, we need to analyze a frame with an arbitrary lateral load of 20 kips applied at
the 2nd floor level in conjunction with the factored dead load and live load as shown in
Fig. S12-2. In order to take into account the live load reduction, an average of live load
reduction factor for exterior and interior columns (0.43) is multiplied with the live load
factor 1.6, yielding 0.69. Therefore, the load combination used is:
1.2D 0.69L 0.5Lr 20 k lateral load .
3. Compute the factored axial loads and moments from a first-order frame analysis. As
explained in Example 12-3, the unfactored moments for exterior columns can be
determined based on the live load pattern shown in Fig. S12-3 while those for interior
columns based on the live load pattern shown Fig. S12-4. After a structural analysis is
made, live load reduction factors will be applied. All results and calculation are shown in
Table P12-2.
12-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
20 kips
Factored dead load and live load plus arbitrary lateral load to evaluate stability index, Q
Fig. S12-2
12-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Table P12-2
(Forces in kips Moments in k-ft) Exterior Column Interior Column
PD 285 487
PL reduced 48.8 79.9
PLr 10 18.5
M D top 37.0 -4.9
M D bottom -36.2 5.5
M L top, reduced 20.9 0.67 14 18.2 0.46 8.4
M L bottom, reduced 20.5 0.67 13.7 2.8 0.46 1.3
Exterior column
12-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Interior column
0.2 Ec I g Es I se
EI
1 dns
I g 8750 in.4
Ec 3600 ksi
I se 150 in.4
( )
EI 5.88 106 kip-in 2
M c 66.8 k-ft
Interior column
M1 8.68
Cm 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 ( ) 0.42
M2 19.3
( )
Since dns (int) does not change significantly, EI and Pc will
remain essentially the same.
M c 67.8 k-ft
12-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
e 1.9
0.11
h 18
g 0.015
Fig. A-9b yields
Interior column
g 0.015
Because reading from the graph may not be accurate given the two
values are so close, we need to select reinforcement for the column and
check its capacity against the demand. Select 8 bars #8, Example 12-3
shows , OK.
E. Check with gravity plus wind load case 1.2D 1.6W 0.5 L Lr
Pu oh
1. Calculation of the stability index Q
Vus c
Similar to the gravity load case, we need to do one single analysis with the wind load plus
gravity load case. To take into account of the live load reduction, an average live load
reduction factor of 0.43 will be multiplied with the live load factor 0.5, yielding 0.22.
Therefore, the load combination becomes 1.2D 1.6W 0.215Lr 0.5L . A structural
analysis yields the following results:
12-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4.46 kips
6.61 kips
6.61 kips
6.61 kips
8.49 kips
Wind load
Fig. S12-5
A structural analysis of the frame subjected to the wind load (without the load factor) yields
the following results, as shown in Table P12-3.
Table P12-3
Forces in kips
Exterior Column Interior Column
Moments in k-ft
PW 10.4 0.5
MW top 46.2 65
MW bottom -46 -64.6
Exterior column
( )
M 2 M 2ns s M 2 s
M 2ns 1.2M D 0.5M L 1.2 37 0.5 14 51.4 k-ft
M 2 s 1.6MW 1.6 46.2 73.9 k-ft
M 2 51.4 1.13 73.9 135 k-ft
Interior column
12-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
( )
M 2 M 2ns s M 2 s
M 2ns 1.2M D 0.5M L 1.2 4.9 0.5 8.4 10.1 k-ft
M 2 s 1.6MW 1.6 65 104 k-ft
M 2 10.1 1.13 104 128 k-ft
Note that the Pu 2005 kips does not differ significantly from
Pu 2 387 632 2038 kips
g 0.01
Fig. A-9b yields
At this point, we can select 8 bars #6 ( Ast 3.52 in.2 , g 0.011 ) for the exterior columns.
Interior column
g 0.02
Conclusion: The cross section of exterior and interior columns is 18 in. x 18 in. Use 8 bars #6 for
exterior columns, and 8 bars #8 for interior columns.
12-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 13
13-1 Compute for the edge beam shown in Fig. P13-1. The concrete for the slab and
beam was placed in one pour.
Ib
Because the slab and the beam have the same elastic modulus, Eq. (13-9) reduces to f
Is
1. Compute I b . The cross section of the beam is shown in Fig. S13-1.1 and I b is computed for the
shaded area.
13 in.
7 in.
20 in.
45
16 in. ≤ 28 in.
4
Part Area, in.2 ytop , in. Aytop I own , in. Ay 2 ,in.4
Web 320 10 3200 10,670 663
Flanges 91 3.5 319 372 2331
411 3519 Ib 14,030 in.4
3519
ytop 8.56 in.
411
I g 14,030 in.4
2. Compute I s . The cross section of the slab is shown in Fig. S13-1.2 and I s is computed for the
shaded portion of the slab.
(108 8) 73
Is 3316 in.4
12
13-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3. Compute f .
13-2 Compute the column-strip and middle-strip moments in the long-span direction for
an interior panel of the flat-slab shown in Fig. 13-25. Assume the slab is 6 in. thick,
the design live load is 40 psf and the superimposed dead load is 5 psf for ceiling,
flooring, and so on, plus 25 psf for the partitions. The columns are 10 in. 12 in., as
shown in Fig. 13-25.
6
qu 1.2 150 5 25 1.6 40 190 psf
12
Note: if the local building code allows a live-load reduction, the 40-psf live load could be
multiplied by the appropriate reduction factor.
12
n 14.5 13.5 ft
12
2 13.2 ft
The column strip extends the smaller of 2 4 or 1 4 on each side of the column centerline
(ACI Code Section 13.2.1). Thus, the column strip extends 13.2 4 3.3 ft on each side of column
centerlines. The total width of the column strip is 6.6 ft. Each half-middle strip extends from the
edge of the column strip to the centerline of the panel. The total width of two half-middle strips is
13.2 6.6 6.6 ft
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.2, for an interior span, the total moment is divided as follows:
Negative moments
From Table 13-3 for f 1 2 1 0 (since there are no beam between the columns).
Column-strip negative moment = 0.75 37 27.8 kip-ft
Middle-strip negative moment = 0.25 37 9.3 kip-ft
13-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Half of the middle-strip negative moment, -4.7 kip-ft, goes to each of the adjacent half-middle
strip. Because the adjacent bays have the same width, 2 , a similar moment will be assigned to
the other half of each middle strip so that the total middle-strip negative moment is 9.3 kip-ft.
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for f 1 2 1 0 ,
Column-strip positive moment = 0.60 20 12 kip-ft
Middle-strip positive moment = 0.40 20 8 kip-ft
13-3 Use the direct-design method to compute the moments for the column-strip and
middle-strip spanning perpendicular to the edge of the exterior bay of the flat-plate
shown in Fig. P13-3. Assume the slab is 7.5 in. thick and supports a superimposed
dead load of 25 psf and a live load of 50 psf. There is no edge beam. The columns are
all 18 in. square.
7.5
qu 1.2 150 25 1.6 50 223 psf
12
Note: if the local building code allows a live-load reduction, the 50-psf live load could be
multiplied by the appropriate factor.
2. Compute the static moment for the span perpendicular to the edge of the exterior bay
18
n 20 18.5 ft
12
2 19 ft
The column strip extends the smaller of 2 4 or 1 4 on each side of the column centerline
(ACI Code Section 13.2.1). Thus, the column strip extends 19 4 4.75 ft on each side of column
centerlines. The total width of the column strip is 9.5ft. Each half-middle strip extends from the
edge of the column strip to the centerline of the panel. The total width of two half-middle strips is
19 9.5 9.5 ft
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.3, for a “slab without beams between interior supports and
without edge beam”, the total moment is divided as follows:
13-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Half of the middle-strip negative moment, -16 kip-ft, goes to each of the adjacent half-middle
strip. Because the adjacent bays have the same width, 2 ,a similar moment will be assigned to
the other half of each middle strip so that the total middle-strip negative moment is 32 kip-ft.
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for f 2 1 0,
Column-strip positive moment = 0.60 94 56 kip-ft
Middle-strip positive moment = 0.40 94 38 kip-ft
13-4 For the slab configuration and loading conditions in P13-3, use the direct-design
method to compute moments for the edge-column strip and the middle strip
spanning parallel to the edge of the slab.
7.5
qu 1.2 150 25 1.6 50 223 psf
12
Note: if the local building code allows a live-load reduction, the 50-psf live load could be
multiplied by the appropriate factor.
2. Compute the static moment for the span parallel to the edge of the slab.
18
n 19 17.5 ft
12
For the definition of 2 refer to Fig. 13-22 in the textbook.
20 9
Edge frame: 2,e 10.8 ft
2 12
13-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Generally, the column strip extends the smaller of 4 on each side of the column
2 4 or 1
19 9
centerline (ACI Code Section 13.2.1).Thus; the width of the edge-column strip is 5.5 ft
4 12
The half-middle strip extends from the edge of the column strip to the centerline of the panel. The
total width of two half-middle strips is 20 9.5 10.5 ft .
The static moment M o can be calculated from Eq. (13-5).
223 10.8 17.52
2
qu
Edge frame: M o 2,e n
1 92.2 kip-ft
8 8 1000
223 20 17.52
2
qu
Interior frame: M o 2,i n
1 171 kip-ft
8 8 1000
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.2, for the edge frame, the total moment is divided as follows:
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for f 2 1 0,
Edge column-strip positive moment = 0.80 32 25.6 kip-ft
1
Middle-strip positive moment = 0.40 32 0.40 59.9 =18.4 kip-ft
2
13-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
1
Note that 0.40 0.80 1.0
2
13-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
13-5 A 7-in. thick flat-plate slab with spans of 20 ft in each direction is supported on 16
in. 16 in. columns. The average effective depth is 5.6 in. Assume the slab supports
its own dead load, plus 25 psf superimposed dead load and 40 psf live load. The
concrete strength is 4000 psf. Check two-way shear at a typical interior support.
Assume unbalanced moments are negligible.
One-way shear is critical at a distance from the face of the column. Thus, the critical
sections for one-way shear are A-A and B-B in Fig. S13-5.1. The loaded areas causing shear on
these sections are cross hatched. Their outer boundaries are lines of symmetry on which Vu 0 .
We will only check the shear for section A-A, since the check for section B-B is the same.
6
6
6 6
13-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
( )
Because there is no shear reinforcement, we have Vn V c and from Eq. (13-27),
( √ ) ( √ )⁄
Punching shear is critical on a rectangular section located at d 2 away from the column face, as
shown in Fig. S13-5.2. The critical perimeter is 21.6 in. by 21.6 in. The average d value for
determining the shear strength of the slab is d 5.6 in.
( )
13-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Therefore, the smallest values is Vc 122 kips , so Vc 0.75 122 91.5 kips > Vu and the slab
is OK in two-way shear.
13-6 Assume the slab described in Problem 13-5 is supported on 10 in. 24 in. columns.
Check two-way shear at a typical interior support. Assume unbalanced moments
are negligible.
Punching shear is critical on a rectangular section located at d 2 away from the column face, as
shown in Fig. S13-6.2. The critical perimeter is 29.6 in. by 15.6 in. The average d value for
determining the shear strength of the slab is d 5.6 in.
( )
13-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
24
For Eq. (13-25), 2.4 (since column is 10 in. by 24 in.). Therefore,
10
4
Vc 2 fc' bo d 2
4
2.4
1 4000 90.4 5.6 1000 117 kips
1
Therefore, the smallest values is Vc 117 kips , so Vc 0.75 117 88 kips > Vu and the slab is
OK in two-way shear.
13-7 The slab shown in Fig. P13-7 supports a superimposed dead load of 25 psf and a live
load of 60 psf. The slab extends 4 in. past the exterior face of the column to support
an exterior wall that weighs 400 lbs/ft of length of wall. The story-to-story height is
9.5 ft. Use 4500-psi concrete and Grade-60 reinforcement.
From Table 13-1, the minimum thicknesses of the four typical slab panels are as follows:
Panel 1-2-A-B (corner; treat as exterior), and panels 2-3-A-B and 1-2-B-C (exterior)
13-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Check the thickness for shear. We should check the shear at columns A2 and B2
The tributary area for column A2 is cross-hatched in Fig. S 13-7.1 The factored uniform load can
be calculated as:
8
qu 1.2 150 25 1.6 60 246 psf
12
Note that if the area of any of the panels exceeded 400 ft 2 , it would be possible to reduce the live
load before factoring it.
Fig. S 13-7.1 Initial critical shear perimeters and tributary areas for column A2.
The critical shear perimeter is located at d 2 away from the interior column face and 4 in. from
the exterior column face, as shown in Fig. S 13-7.1. In the following calculation for the factored
shear force transmitted to column A2, the shear force multiplier of 1.15 required for the first
interior support will be applied directly to the appropriate tributary lengths. Then,
davg 8 0.75 0.5 6.75 in. (assuming 3 in. clear cover and No. 4 bars as slab
4
reinforcement).
bo 22.75 2 23.38 69.5 in.
12 22.75 23.38
Vu 246 9 1.15 9 10 1.2 400 9 1.15 9 60700 lbs 61 kips
12 144
13-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
From Eq.(13-25),
16
1
16
4
2 6.0 4 (does not govern)
From Eq. (13-26),
s 30 , for an exterior slab-column connection
sd 30 6.75
2 2 4.91 4.0 (does not govern)
bo 69.5
(b) Use the direct design method to compute moments, and then design the
reinforcement for the column and middle strips associated with column line
2.
A2 B2 C2
1 (ft) 20.0 20.0
n (ft) 18.67 18.67
2 (ft) 18.0 18.0
qu (ksf) 0.25 0.25
2
qu
Mo 2 n
(kip-ft) 196 196
8
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -51 +102 -137 -127 +69 -127
13-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
A1 B1 C1
1 (ft) 20.0 20.0
n (ft) 18.67 18.67
2 (ft) 10.0 10.0
qu (ksf) 0.25 0.25
2
qu
Mo 2 n
(kip-ft) 109 109
8
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -28 +57 -76 -71 +38 -71
Wall load (kip/ft) 0.48 0.48
q 2
Wall M o wall n 21 21
8
Moments from wall
-5.5 11 -15 -14 +7 -14
(kip-ft)
Distribute the negative and positive moments to the column and middle strips and design the
reinforcement.
In each panel, the column strip extends 0.25 min 1 , 2 0.25 18 12 54 in. on each side
of the column lines. The total width of the column strip is 2 54 in.= 108 in. 9 ft . The width of
the middle strip is 9 ft. The edge strip has a width of 54 in. 12 in. 66 in. 5.5 ft .
Place the steel in the long direction close to the surface of the slab. Try No. 4 bars. Thus,
d 8 0.75 0.25 7.0 in.
Compute trial As required at the section of maximum moment (column strip at B2). The largest
M u is 102.3 kip-ft. Assuming that jd 0.95 ,
102.3 12,000
As (trial) 3.42 in.2
0.9 60,000 0.95 7.0
Compute a and check whether the section is tension controlled:
3.42 60,000
a 0.82 in.
0.85 4500 5.5 12
0.82
c 1.00 in.
0.825
Clearly, the section is tension-controlled; therefore, 0.9 .
0.82
Compute the value of jd : jd 7.0 6.59 in.
2
Assuming that a is constant for all sections (conservative assumption), compute a constant for
computing As :
M u 12,000
As (in.2 ) 0.0337 M u (kip-ft) (Eq. A)
0.9 60,000 6.59
13-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
The values of As required in the following table are computed from Eq. (A).
From ACI Code Section 13.3.1,
As ,min 0.0018bh for Grade-60 reinforcement. Maximum bar spacing is 2h (ACI Code
Section 13.3.2), but not more than 18 in. (ACI Code Section 7.12.2.2). Therefore maximum is
16 in.
13-14
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(c) Check two-way shear and moment transfer at columns A2 and B2. Neglect
unbalanced moments about column line 2.
Column A2
13-15
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
The critical perimeter is at d 2 from the face of the column, where d is the average depth. At all
exterior ends, the reinforcement is No. 4 bars and davg 6.75 in. The shortest perimeter results
from the section shown in Fig. S13-7.2 and the perimeter dimensions are,
b 1 20 in. d 2 23.38 in.
b 2 16 in. d 22.75 in.
For moments about the z z axis,
2 23.38 5.69 23.38 2
y AB 7.86 in.
2 23.38 5.69 22.75 5.69
Therefore, cAB 7.86 in. and cCD 15.52 in.
For moments about the w w axis,
22.75
cCB cAD 11.38 in.
2
For slabs designed by the direct-design method, the moment transferred from the slab to the
column axis z-z is 0.3M o , and using the moments calculated from part (b),
0.3 M o 0.3 196 58.8 kip-ft (acting about the centroid of the shear perimeter).
From part (b), we found that the unbalanced moment due to the wall moments is 7 kip-ft and
assuming that the loads acts at 2 in. from the edge of the slab,
23.38 2.0 7.86 13.52 in. from centroid
13-16
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Note that the unbalanced moment about column line 2 M w w is neglected as stated in the
problem.
50.9 12,000
As (in.2 ) 1.70 kip-ft (steel chosen OK)
0.71
0.9 60,000 7
2
The reinforcement ratio is,
A 1.8
s 0.0064
bd 40 7
and from Eq. (4-24),
0.85 0.825 4500 0.003
b 0.0311 ,
60,000 0.003 0.00207
and thus, 0.375b 0.0117 0.0064 and we can use f 1.0 . As a result, it is not necessary to
transfer any of the moment about z-z axis by eccentric shear stresses.
Column B2
The critical perimeter is shown in Fig. S 13-7.3 and the centroidal axes pass through the centers
of the sides.
bo 2 22.75 22.75 91 in.
13-17
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
From Eq.(13-25),
4
2 6.0 4 (does not govern)
From Eq. (13-26),
s 40 , for an interior slab-column connection
sd 40 6.75
2 2 4.97 4.0 (does not govern)
ob 91
From Eq. (13-32), calculate the fraction of moment transferred by flexure (x-x axis),
1 1
f 0.6
2 2
1 b1 b2 1 1
3 3
The torsional moment of inertia can be calculated from Eq. (13-34),
b d 3 db3 b
2
J c 2 1 1 2 b2 d 1
12 12 2
Where d 6.75 in. and b1 b2 22.75 in. Thus, J c 54150 in.4
By inspection, the reinforcement that is already in the slab is adequate for moment transfer.
13-18
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (13-30) and neglecting unbalanced moment about column line 2 (i.e. about axis y-y),
M u (shear transfer) M u 1 0.6 10 4 kip-ft 48,000 lb-in.
Then,
Muc 48,000 11.38
12.1 psi
Jc 45,150
So,
102,000 124,000
u (max) 12.1 166 psi 12.1 psi=178 psi c 202 psi
91 6.75 91 6.75
Thus, the shear is OK at this column.
13-8 Refer to the slab shown in Fig. P13-7 and the loadings and material strengths given
in Problem 13-7.
(b) Use the direct design method to compute moments, and then design the
reinforcement for the column and middle strips associated with column line
A.
13-19
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
2
qu
Mo 2 n
(kip-ft) 174 174
8
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -45 +90 -122 -113 +61 -113
Distribute the negative and positive moments to the column and middle strips and design the
reinforcement.
In each panel, the column strip extends 0.25 min 1 , 2 0.25 18 12 54 in. on each side
of the column lines. The total width of the column strip is 2 54 in.= 108 in. 9 ft . The width of
the middle strip is 9 ft. The edge strip has a width of 54 in. 12 in. 66 in. 5.5 ft .
Place the steel in the long direction close to the surface of the slab. Try No. 4 bars. Thus,
d 8 0.75 0.25 7.0 in.
Compute trial As required at the section of maximum moment (column strip at B2). The largest
M u is 91.5 kip-ft. Assuming that jd 0.95 ,
Assuming that a is constant for all sections (conservative assumption), compute a constant for
computing As (Eq. A):
The values of As required in the following table are computed from Eq. (A).
13-20
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
13-21
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
13-9 For the corner column (A1) in Fig. P13-7 and the loadings and material strengths
given in Problem 13-7, select a slab thickness to satisfy ACI Code strength
requirements for two-way shear and moment transfer, and deflection control.
(a) Make the check for moment transfer in only one principal direction (use the
more critical direction).
Now check whether this thickness is OK for shear at column A1, considering moment transfer in
the more critical direction:
Note that if the area of any of the panels exceeded 400 ft 2 , it would be possible to
reduce the live load before factoring it, but this is not the case for column A1. Therefore the
factored uniform load acting on the corner panel is:
8 in lb
qu 1.2 150 3 25 psf 1.6 60 psf 246 psf
12 in ft
ft
Although the shear force acting on the first interior column face is amplified by 1.15, the ACI
Code does not permit reducing the tributary shear area for an exterior column to below 0.5 in
either principal direction. Also note that the critical shear perimeter is located at d 2 away from
the interior column faces.
Therefore,
davg 8 in 0.75 in 0.5 in 6.75 in
13-22
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
cAB 5.85 in
2 b1d b2 d 4 23.4 in 6.75 in
b d 3 db 3 b
2
J c 18,600 in 4
And, the more critical moment transfer axis is along column line 1, which is presented in the
solution to Problem 13-7.
M u 28 k-ft
Finally, we can calculate the maximum combined shear stress considering moment transfer in the
more critical direction as follows:
in
0.4 28 k-ft 12 16 in
Vu v M u c 26.1 k ft
vu 0.198 ksi 198 psi
bo d Jc 46.8 in 6.75 in 18,600 in 4
Now compare compute vn to check whether this level of shear stress is acceptable.
4 f c' 0.75 4 1 4500 psi 201 psi
4 4
vn 2 f c' 0.75 2 4500 psi 302 psi
1
d
s 2 f c' 0.75 20 6.75 in 2 4500 psi 246 psi
bo 46.8 in
13-23
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Therefore,
vn 201 psi 198 psi vu OK
(b) Make the check for moment transfer in both principal directions, but permit
a 20 percent increase in the maximum permissible shear stress calculated at
the corner of the critical shear perimeter.
Now we can calculate the maximum combined shear stress considering moment transfer in both
principal directions as follows:
V M c M c
vu u v u1 v u 2
bo d Jc Jc
in in
0.4 28 k-ft 12 16 in 0.4 25 k-ft 12 16 in
26.1 k ft ft
vu
46.8 in 6.75 in 18,600 in 4 18,600 in 4
vu 0.301 ksi 301 psi
Now compare compute vn to check whether this level of shear stress is acceptable.
4 f c' 0.75 4 1 4500 psi 201 psi
4 4
vn 2 f c' 0.75 2 4500 psi 302 psi
1
d
s 2 f c' 0.75 20 6.75 in 2 4500 psi 246 psi
bo 46.8 in
Even allowing for a 20% increase in the maximum permissible shear stress, a slab thickness of 8
in does not seem to be deep enough to satisfy this shear check. Repeat with h = 9.5 in.
davg 9.5 in 0.75 in 0.5 in 8.25 in
bo 2 16 in 4 in 8.25 in / 2 48.3 in
24.1 in 2
Vu 246 psf 10 ft 1 ft 9 ft 1 ft
26100 lb 26.1 k
in 2
144
ft 2
b1 b2 24.1 in
d b1 8.25 in 24.1 in
2 2
cAB 6.03 in
2 b1d b2 d 4 24.1 in 8.25 in
13-24
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
b d 3 db 3 b
2
J c 25, 200 in 4
So, now the shear stress demand is:
V M c M c
vu u v u1 v u 2
bo d Jc Jc
in in
0.4 28 k-ft 12 16 in 0.4 25 k-ft 12 16 in
26.1 k ft ft
vu
48.3 in 8.25 in 25, 200 in 4 25, 200 in 4
vu 0.227 ksi 227 psi
If a 9.5 in deep slab is used, then 227 psi vu 1.2 vn 241 psi .
(c) Check one-way shear for a critical diagonal section across the corner near
the corner column.
Assume that the critical section for one-way shear at this corner column occurs at a 45 degree
angle from either of the exterior edges, at a distance, d, from the most interior corner. If we
assume that d = 6.75 in, as in part (a), the length of the critical section is as follows:
2 4 in 16 in 2 6.75 in 70 in
Therefore,
35.0 in 2
Vu 246 psf 10 ft 1 ft 9 ft 1 ft
25000 lb 25.0 k
in 2
144
ft 2
Therefore, a slab with h = 8 in will not fail in one-way shear along this diagonal failure plane.
13-25
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
13-10 For the slab system shown in Fig. P13-7, assume the slab has four equal spans in the
north-south direction and three equal spans in the east-west direction. Use the
loading and material strengths given in Problem 13-7 and assume a slab thickness of
7.5 in.
For this solution, structural analysis software is used to model an equivalent frame used
to represent the column line in question. Before this can be done, an appropriate equivalent frame
must be defined, which is done here following recommendations from the text.
Column properties:
Ag 16 in 16 in 256 in 2
16 in 16 in
3
Ig 5460 in 4
12
I e I g 5460 in 4
Note that a full 9.5 ft of column will be modeled above and below the slab. These
elements will be fixed at their ends.
Beam properties:
In the positive bending regions and the negative bending regions near interior columns:
0.5 , 0.5
bh3 2 h3 0.5 18 ft 12 in/ft 7.5 in
3
Ig 3800 in 4
12 12 12
I e I g 0.5I g 1900 in 4
In the negative bending regions near exterior columns (assumed to be 0.2 1 ft long):
0.2 , 0.33
bh3 2 h3 0.2 18 ft 12 in/ft 7.5 in
3
Ig 1520 in 4
12 12 12
I e I g 0.33I g 500 in 4
Loads to be applied:
7.5 in lb lb lb k
qD 18 ft 150 3 25 2 2140 2.14
12 in ft ft ft ft
ft
lb lb k
qL 18 ft 60 2 1080 1.08
ft ft ft
use qU 1.2qD 1.6qL with appropriate pattern loading schemes for each location
13-26
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Some discussion should be presented in the solution, in addition to this table, commenting on the
relative precision of the two approaches, noting that neither is necessarily accurate nor “correct”,
although they are hopefully close to reality. It might be noted that similar discrepancies show up
when the results of a software analysis of a frame system are compared with the results from
using an ACI moment coefficient approach.
For this solution, structural analysis software is used to model an equivalent frame used
to represent the column line in question. Before this can be done, an appropriate equivalent frame
must be defined, which is done here following recommendations from the text.
Column properties:
Ag 16 in 16 in 256 in 2
16 in 16 in
3
Ig 5460 in 4
12
I e I g 5460 in 4
Note that a full 9.5 ft of column will be modeled above and below the slab. These
elements will be fixed at their ends.
Beam properties:
In the positive bending regions and the negative bending regions near interior columns:
0.5 , 0.5
( )
In the negative bending regions near exterior columns (assumed to be 0.2 1 ft long):
0.2 , 0.33
( )
13-27
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Loads to be applied:
( )( )
( )( )
use qU 1.2qD 1.6qL with appropriate pattern loading schemes for each location
Some discussion should be presented in the solution, in addition to this table, commenting on the
relative precision of the two approaches. It should be mentioned that neither is necessarily
accurate nor “correct”, although they are hopefully close to reality. It might be noted that similar
discrepancies show up when the results of a software analysis of a frame system are compared
with the results from using an ACI moment coefficient approach.
13-11 For the same floor system described in Problem 13-10 and the loading and material
strengths given in Problem 13-7, assume the slab thickness has been selected to be
6.5 in.
(a) For a typical interior floor panel, calculate the immediate deflection due to
live load and compare to the limit given in ACI Code Table 9.5 (b).
Step 1: Compute the immediate deflection of an interior column strip, which should be taken in
the N-S direction, as these are the longer span column strips. Take the span between columns B-
2 and C-2 as the interior span in question.
First compute Ma. The loads we must consider for deflection calculations are:
6.5 in lb
Dead load: 1.0 Dead Load 150 3 25 psf 106 psf
in ft
12
ft
Service load: 1.0 Dead Live 106 psf 60 psf 166 psf
Construction load: 2.0 Slab Dead Load 2 81.3 psf 163 psf
Therefore, cracking will be governed by the service load. Since we know that the moments
calculated in Problem 13-7b are based on an area load of 246 psf, we can take Ma to be 166/246 =
0.675 times the column strip moments calculated in Problem 13-7b, as follows:
Negative moment at B-2 and C-2: 0.675 95.2 k-ft 64.3 k-ft
Positive moment at midspan: 0.675 41.1 k-ft 27.7 k-ft
13-28
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Next, we have to compute Icr and Ie. For simplicity, we will assume that the reinforcement
selected in Problem 13-7 is used in this slab as well.
Negative moment region:
11 0.31 in 2
0.00486
in
9 ft 12 6.5 in
ft
29,000,000 psi
n 7.58
57,000 4500 psi
n 0.0368
k 2 n n n 2 0.0368 0.0368 0.0368 0.237
2 2
1
I cr b kd Ast n d kd
3 2
3
1 in
9 ft 12 0.237 5.4 in 3.41 in 2 7.58 5.4 in 0.237 5.4 in 514 in 4
3 2
3 ft
3
M
3
31.9 k-ft
I e I cr I g I cr cr 514 in 4 2470 in 4 514 in 4
753 in
4
a
M 64.3 k-ft
Positive moment region:
I e I g 2470 in 4
So, the weighted average value of Ie is:
I e( average) 0.7 I em 0.15 I e1 I e 2 0.7 2470 in 4 0.15 753 in 4 753 in 4 1950 in 4
Now we can calculate the immediate deflection due to live load. Using the same logic described
in Example 13-16, assume that 67.5% of the loads will be carried by the column strip.
wL 60 psf 18 ft 0.675 0.729 k/ft 60.8 lb/in
wD 106 psf 18 ft 0.675 1.29 k/ft 107 lb/in
4
in
60.8 lb/in 20 ft 12
wL 4 ft
L (column strip max) 0.0048 0.0048 0.130 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi 1950in 4
4
in
4 107 lb/in 20 ft 12
D (column strip max)
w
0.0026 D 0.0026 ft
0.124 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi 1950in 4
Step 2: Compute the immediate deflection of an interior middle strip, which should be taken in
the E-W direction, as these are the shorter span middle strips. Take an interior span between
column lines 2 and 3.
13-29
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
First compute Ma. The loads we must consider for deflection calculations are:
6.5 in lb
Dead load: 1.0 Dead Load 150 3 25 psf 106 psf
in ft
12
ft
Service load: 1.0 Dead Live 106 psf 60 psf 166 psf
Construction load: 2.0 Slab Dead Load 2 81.3 psf 163 psf
Therefore, cracking will be governed by the service load. Since we know that the moments
calculated in Problem 13-7b are based on an area load of 246 psf, we can take Ma to be 166/246 =
0.675 times the slab strip moments calculated using the loading described in Problem 13-7b.
Negative moment at B-2 and C-2: 0.675 28.3 k-ft 19.1 k-ft
Positive moment at midspan: 0.675 24.4 k-ft 16.5 k-ft
Now we can calculate the immediate deflection due to live load. Using the same logic described
in Example 13-16, assume that 32.5% of the loads will be carried by the middle strip.
wL 60 psf 20 ft 0.325 0.390 k/ft 32.5 lb/in
wD 106 psf 20 ft 0.325 0.689 k/ft 57.4 lb/in
4
in
4 32.5 lb/in 18 ft 12
L (middle strip max)
w
0.0048 L 0.0048 ft
0.029 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi 3020in 4
4
in
4 57.4 lb/in 18 ft 12
D (middle strip max)
w
0.0026 D 0.0026 ft
0.028 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi 3020in 4
Step 3: Compute the maximum immediate total deflection in the panel due to the live load, and
compare against allowable deflections according to ACI Code limits.
L(max) 0.130 in 0.029 in 0.159 in
13-30
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
in
20 ft 12
ACI Code Limit / 360 ft 0.667 in We are OK.
360
(b) For the same floor panel, calculate the total deflection after the attachment
of partitions and compare to the limit given in ACI Code Table 9.5(b) for
partitions that are not likely to be damaged by long term deflections.
Assume that 85 percent of the dead load is acting when the partitions are
attached to the structure and assume that 25 percent of the live load will be
sustained for a period of one year.
We will assume that the total expected deflection after the attachment of partitions is a
sum of the following:
1. Dead load
Assuming that 85% of the dead load is already acting when the partitions are
attached, consider 15% of the immediate deflection due to dead load affects the
partitions.
Dead immediate 0.1 (0.124 in 0.028 in) 0.015 in
2. Live load
Assume that the total instantaneous deflection due to live load could occur at any
time once the partitions are attached, so include the full instantaneous deflection
due to live load.
Live immediate 0.159 in
Compare this to the ACI limit for slab systems supporting partitions which are not
likely to be damaged by large deflections:
in
20 ft 12
ACI Code Limit / 240 ft 1.0 in We are OK.
240
13-12 Repeat the questions in Problem 13-11 for the following panels.
(a) An exterior panel along the west side of the floor system.
13-31
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
This solution will follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The column
strip in question will still be taken along the N-S direction. The major change will lie in the
definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
(b) An exterior panel along the north side of the floor system.
This solution will follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The column
strip in question will still be taken along the N-S direction. The major change will again lie in the
definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
This solution will again follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The
column strip in question will still be taken along the N-S direction. The major change will still lie
in the definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
13-32
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 14
14-1 For the slab panel shown in Fig. P14-1, use the yield-line method to determine the
minimum value of the area load, , at the formation of the critical yield-line
mechanism.
We may need to investigate two yield-line mechanisms to find the minimum qf.
II 9 ft.
I 18 ft.
A B
L1
LL11==20
22ftft.
Mechanism No. 1
2. Assume a virtual displacement equal to along the positive yield line from A to B.
3. Compute the internal work. For slab segment I the internal work is:
( ) ( )
Similarly, the internal work for slab segment II is:
( ) ( )
Therefore, the sum of the internal work is:
∑ ( ) ( )
4. Compute the external work. The two end regions outside of the points A and B are essentially two
half-pyramids that can be combined into a single pyramid with a base area 18 ft x 2 x 20 ft. The
central region between points A and B has a triangular cross-section and extends over a length of
20 ft x (1 – 2 ). Thus, the external work is:
[ ( ) ] ( )
14-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
5. Equate the external and internal work. Set EW = ∑ and solve for qf.
( )
( )
6. Solve for the minimum value of qf. The solution table below starts with = 0.5 and slowly
decreases .
From this table the minimum value of qf is 0.478 ksf and it occurs for a value of 0.50. Because of
this result, we should investigate a second possible yield-line mechanism.
II
D
I
C L2 = 18 ft.
L2
10
11 ftft
20
22 ft
ft.
Mechanism No. 2
9. Compute the internal work. For slab segment I the internal work is:
( ) ( )
Similarly, the internal work for slab segment II is:
( ) ( )
Therefore, the sum of the internal work is:
∑ ( ) ( )
10. Compute the external work. The two end regions outside of the points C and D are essentially
two half-pyramids that can be combined into a single pyramid with a base area 20 ft x 2 x 18 ft.
14-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
The central region between points C and D has a triangular cross-section and extends over a length of
18 ft x (1 – 2 ). Thus, the external work is:
[ ( ) ] ( )
11. Equate the external and internal work. Set EW = ∑ and solve for qf.
( )
( )
12. Solve for the minimum value of qf. The solution table below starts with = 0.5 and slowly
decreases .
From this table the minimum value of qf is 0.467 ksf and it occurs for an value of approximately
0.47. In this case it was important for us to investigate this second possible yield-line mechanism.
14-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
14-2 For the slab panel shown in Fig. P14-2, use the yield-line method to determine the
minimum value of the area load, , at the formation of the critical yield-line
mechanism.
II A
L1 = 20 ft.
I L1
20 ft.
2. Assume a virtual displacement equal to along the positive yield line from A to B.
3. Compute the internal work. For slab segment I the internal work is:
( ) ( )
Similarly, the internal work for slab segment II is:
( ) ( )
Therefore, the sum of the internal work is:
∑ ( ) ( )
4. Compute the external work. The end region below the point A is essentially a half-pyramid with a
base area of 20 ft x x 20 ft. The region between points A and B has a triangular cross-section and
extends over a length of 20 ft x (1 – ). Thus, the external work is:
[ ( ) ] ( )
5. Equate the external and internal work. Set EW = ∑ and solve for qf.
( )
( )
14-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6. Solve for the minimum value of qf. The solution table below starts with = 0.75 and increase in
increments of 0.05.
From this table the minimum value of qf is 0.228 ksf and it occurs for a value of approximately
0.90.
14-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
14-3 For the slab panel shown in Fig. P14-3, use the yield-line method to determine the
minimum value of the area load, , at the formation of the critical yield-line
mechanism.
LIII
X
C
III
II
D
18 ft
I
Y
A B E
24 ft
This is a complex mechanism with many potential variables. We will select values for some of the
distances shown in this figure as an initial trial. A few points should be noted regarding this
mechanism. As stated in the text, a positive yield line between two adjacent plate segments will
extend to or toward the intersection of the axes of rotation for those two plate segments. Thus, the
positive yield line A-D starts at the intersection between the axes of rotation for segments I and II (at
point A). Similarly, the other two positive yield lines branching out from point D aim toward the
points E (intersection of axes of rotation for segments I and III) and F (intersection of axes of rotation
for segments II and III). Experience with this particular mechanism indicates that the minimum value
of qf will occur when the point D is relatively close to the corner column support.
2. Select trial values for the assumed mechanism. The following values were selected for the
mechanism shown above.
B-E = 24 ft C-F = 18 ft Y = 15 ft X = 20 ft
With these values selected, geometry can be used to determine the additional values shown on the
following figure. It should be noted that the three lines extending from the slab to line E-F (the axes
of rotation for segment III) are all perpendicular to that line.
14-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
F
24
.5'
4.5
'
4.1
9'
'
4.0
C
17.1'
0'
4.8
III
'
11
26
4.
D .9'
18 ft II
I
12.9'
A B E
24 ft
4. Compute the internal work. For the three slab segments the internal work is:
IW ( I ) (m p mn ) 24 ft I
k-ft
(6 8) 24 ft (22.4 k)
ft 15 ft
IW ( II ) (m p mn ) 18 ft II
k-ft
(6 8) 18 ft (12.6 k)
k 20 ft
IW ( III ) m p LIII III
k-ft
6 8.60 ft (10.8 k)
k 4.80 ft
Therefore, the sum of the internal work is:
IW 45.8 k
5. Compute the external work. Rather than calculate a displaced volume, we will determine the
magnitude of load acting on each plate segment and then multiply that load times the displacement at
the centroid of the segment. If we did this directly for the defined segments, it would be difficult to
find the centroids of each segment. Thus, for plate segment I we will calculate the work done by the
distributed load acting on the triangular segment A-D-E, and then subtract to work for the triangular
piece outside the actual slab panel. So, for segment I:
(12.9 15)
EW ( I ) A(total) A(outside) q f
3 3
1 1 1 12.9 15
EW ( I ) 48 15 24 12.9 qf
2 3 2 3
(75.6 ft 2 ) q f
14-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6. Setting the sum of the internal work equal to the sum of the external work gives:
45.8 kips
q f (trial) 0.278 ksf
165 ft 2
7. Estimate for the minimum value of qf. Rather than doing several trials, we will assume that the
selected trial mechanism is reasonable and should give an answer within ten percent of the true
minimum value for qf. Thus, we can say:
q f (min) 0.9 0.278 0.250 ksf
14-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
14-4 For the slab panel shown in Fig. P14-4, use the yield-line method to determine the
minimum value of the area load, , at the formation of the critical yield-line
mechanism.
1. Select a plastic yield-line mechanism. Try the mechanism shown below. Note that there is a single
variable for this mechanism, the value of .
free edge
A
II L1 = 18 ft.
L1
I
L2
L2 = 24 ft.
( )
3. Compute the internal work. For slab segment I the internal work is:
( )
( ( )) ( ( )) [ ]
Similarly, the internal work for slab segment II is:
( ) ( ) [ ]
( )
Therefore, the sum of the internal work is:
( )
∑ [ ]
4. Compute the external work. The deflected shape is essentially a half-pyramid, with a combined
base area (18 ft x 24 ft)/2. Thus, the external work is:
[ ]
5. Equate the external and internal work. Set EW = ∑ and solve for qf.
( )
( )
14-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
6. Solve for the minimum value of qf. Because the denominator is constant, we need to minimize the
numerator. It is expected that ≈ 0.5.
From this table the minimum value of qf is 0.381 ksf and it occurs for a value of 0.58.
14-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
14-5 The slab panel shown in Fig. P14-5 is 7.5 in. thick and is made of normal weight
concrete. The slab will need to support a superimposed dead load of 25 psf and a live
load of 60 psf. Assume that the slab will be designed with isotropic top and bottom
reinforcement.
(a) Find the critical yield-line mechanism and then use the appropriate load factors
and strength-reduction factors to determine the required sum of the nominal
negative- and positive-moment capacities ( ) in units of - ⁄ .
Slab weight is (7.5/12) x 150 = 94 psf; Thus, the total dead load = 94 + 25 = 119 psf.
The live load can be reduced based on the panel area (20 x 26 = 520 ft2). Note: KLL = 1.0. For
this area, the reduced live load is equal to 54.5 psf.
So, the total factored load, qu = 1.2 x 119 + 1.6 x 54.5 = 230 psf = 0.230 ksf
2. Select a possible plastic yield-line mechanism. A couple items should be noted. First, in text
Example 14-4, the value of was close to 0.5, so having a virtual displacement of only at a single
point (point A) will give a relatively good answer. Also, because of the fixed supports at the support
edges for plate segments I and II, we would like to make the rotations of those plate segments smaller
than for plate segments III and IV. Thus, will be greater than 0.5.
x 26 ft
III
A
II IV
20 ft
I x 20 ft
26 ft
14-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3. Compute the internal work. For the four slab segments the internal work is:
1.3(mn m p )
IW ( I ) (mn m p ) 26 ft I
0.77(mn m p )
IW ( II ) (mn m p ) 20 ft II
1.3m p
IW ( III ) m p 26 ft III
1
0.77m p
IW ( IV ) m p 20 ft IV
1
From these, the sum of the internal work is:
( )
∑ [ ]
At some point in the design process need to make a decision on the ratio between the flexural strength
of the bottom reinforcement, mp, vs. the strength of the top reinforcement, mn. Reading ahead to
problem 14.5(b), we are asked to assume that . Thus, the internal work can be expressed
as a function of mp.
( )
∑ [ ]
4. Compute the external work. In previous problems we have solved for the distributed load, qf, at the
development of a failure mechanism. In this case, qf is equivalent to qu divided by the strength
reduction factor, , which will be assume to be equal to 0.9. Thus,
qu 0.230 ksf
EW 20 ft 26 ft (173 ft 2 ) (44.2 k)
3 0.9
[ ]
6. Solve for the minimum required value of . The solution table below starts with = 0.5 and
increase in increments of 0.05.
Required , kip-ft/ft
0.50 2.97
0.55 3.07
0.60 3.13
0.65 3.11
From this table the minimum required value of is 3.13 kip-ft/ft. Assuming that ,
kip-ft/ft.
14-12
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
(b) Start with approximately equal to , and then select top and bottom
isotropic reinforcement to provide the required combined flexural strength
calculated in part (a). Be sure to check reinforcement spacing requirements
given in ACI Code Section 13.3.2.
1. From part (a), and kip-ft/ft. Select top and bottom bars to provide the
required moment strength. Assume and . Also, assuming that #4 bars will
suffice, use
( ) ( )
( )
Using #4 bars,
Using #3 bars,
( ) ( )
( )
Using #4 bars,
Using #3 bars,
14-13
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 15
15-1 Design wall footings to be supported 3 ft below grade for the following conditions.
Assume a soil density of ⁄ and normal weight concrete for both problems.
Service dead load is 6 kips/ft, service live load is 8 kips/ft. Wall is 12 in. thick.
Allowable soil pressure, , is 4000 psf. and .
The following design is done for a 1 ft length of footing. Although not included for simplicity, the
“per foot” notation applies to all units in the following solution.
15-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3) Design reinforcement
1.5 ft
2
4) Check development
Bar spacing exceeds 2db and cover exceeds d b This is Case 2 development.
e t f y 1 1 60000 psi
d db 0.5 in. 20 in. 18 in. 3 in., NG.
25 f c 25 1 3500 psi
We shall use 90º standard hooks to anchor the bars. The required development length for
a 90º standard hook is:
0.02 e f y 0.02 1 60000 psi
d db 0.5 in. 10 in. < 18 in. 3 in., OK.
f c 1 3500 psi
Use 10 in. thick by 4 ft. wide footing with #4 bars at 10 in. o.c. with 90º hooks at both ends in the
transverse direction, and 5 #4 bars in the longitudinal direction.
15-2 Design wall footings to be supported 3 ft below grade for the following conditions.
Assume a soil density of ⁄ and normal weight concrete for both problems.
Service dead load is 15 kips/ft, service live load is 8 kips/ft. Wall is 16 in. thick.
Allowable soil pressure, , is 6000 psf. and .
15-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3) Design reinforcement
1.583 ft
2
15-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4) Check development
Bar spacing exceeds 2db and cover exceeds d b This is Case 2 development.
e t f y 1 1 60000 psi
d db 0.625 in. 27.4 in. 19 in. 3 in., NG.
25 f c 25 1 3000 psi
We shall use 90º standard hooks to anchor the bars. The required development length for
a 90º standard hook is:
0.02 e f y 0.02 1 60000 psi
hb db 0.625 in. 14 in. < 19 in. 3 in., OK.
f c 1 3000 psi
Use 12 in. thick by 4 ft – 6 in. wide footing with #5 bars at 12 in. o.c. with 90º hooks at both ends
in the transverse direction, and 6 #4 bars in the longitudinal direction.
Service dead load is 350 kips, service live load is 275 kips. Soil density is ⁄ .
Allowable soil pressure is 4500 psf. Column is 18 in. square. (normal
weight) and . Place bottom of footing at 5 ft below floor level.
15-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
4) Design reinforcement
5.75 ft
2
( )
5) Check development
Bar spacing exceeds 2db and cover exceeds d b This is a Case 2 development.
e t f y 1 1 60000 psi
d db 0.875 in. 35.5 in.<69 in. 3 in., OK.
25 f c 25 1 3500 psi
Use 13 ft square footing, 30 in. thick with 18 #7 bars each way.
15-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Depending on how the column reinforcement is selected, the dowel bars will be selected
accordingly for construction simplicity.
Service dead loads are: axial = 350 k, moment = 80 k-ft; service live loads are:
axial = 250 k, moment = 100 k-ft. The moments are acting about the strong axis of
the column section. Soil density is ⁄ . Allowable soil pressure is 5500 psf.
Place the bottom of the foundation at 4.5 ft below the basement floor. Assume the
basement floor is 6 in. thick and supports a total service load of 80 psf. Assume the
column section is 24 in. x 16 in., is constructed with 5000 psi normal-weight concrete
and contains 6 No. eight bars (Grade 60) placed to give maximum bending
resistance about the strong axis of the column section. Assume the footing will use
and .
1) Select footing dimensions based on allowable soil pressure. Assume a footing thickness of 3
ft. The net permissible bearing pressure is:
( )
Consider only the axial loads to establish the width of the footing.
Use axial loads and moments to establish the length of the footing. Assume a linear
distribution of soil pressure as shown in Fig. 15-5(b). Thus,
Set and .
( )
Set
15-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Therefore,
( ) ( )
Calculate the two-way shear capacity, with Vc taken as the smaller of:
( ) √ ( ) √ √
( ) √ ( ) √ √
√ ⁄ √ ⁄
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( )
√ √
15-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
( )
Assume jd = 0.95d, and use
Use 15 #7 ( )
( )
7) Check development:
15-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 17
17-1 The deep beam shown in Fig. P17-1 supports a factored load of 1450 kips. The beam
and columns are 24 in. wide. Draw a truss model neglecting the effects of stirrups
and the dead load of the wall. Check the strength of the nodes and struts, and design
the tension tie. Use (normal weight concrete) and .
69 36
1450 k
1290 k
644 k
B C
Node 1
21.1 10.5
A D
644 k
1290 k
30 24
243
Fig. S17-1
17-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
69 18 15
RD 1930 kips 644 kips
243 12 15
RA 1930 kips 644 kips 1286 kips 1290 kips
3. Isolate D-regions
Because the distance between the load and the reactions is less than 2h at both ends, the
beam consists of two D-regions, one of each side of the load.
Compute f cu
Node 1
Divide the load into two components equal to the two reactions.
Width of left part of node 1290 k /(2.55 ksi 24 in.) = 21.1 in.
Similarly, the width of the right part of the node = 10.5 in.
Total node width 21.1 10.5 31.6 in. < 36 in. , OK.
Node 2
Width of node = 21.1 in. < 30 in. (assume reaction is at center of column)
Node 3
Width of node = 10.5 in. < 24 in. (assume reaction is at center of column)
17-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Strut 1-2
Axial force = 1290 kips/sin53.1 1610 kips
Horizontal component = 1610 kips cos53.1 967 kips force in Tie 2-3
Strut 1-3
Axial force: 644 kips/sin35.8 1100 kips
Horizontal component: 1100 kips cos35.8 892 kips ( approx. 893 kips, OK.)
6. Select reinforcement for Tie 2-3 (Note that was included in force calculations)
As 893 k / 60 ksi = 14.9 in.2
Use 16 #9 bars ( As 16.0 in.2 )
Provide 4 layers of 4 No. 9 hooked bars. These must be anchored into the column at each
end with anchorage starting where the centroid of the tie first meets the inclined struts at
each end of the beam. The length required for a 90° standard hook is 21.4 in. for a No. 9
bar, which is less than the dimension of each support of column. Thus, this should be OK.
The centroid of the bars should be at about the mid-height of the nodal zones at each end,
i.e. about 7.5 in. above the bottom of the beam.
For horizontal reinforcement, try #5 bars on the front and back faces at a vertical spacing
of 12 in.
2 0.31 in.2
h 0.0022 0.0015 (OK.)
12 in. 24 in.
h 90 55.3 34.7
17-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
2 0.31 in.2
v 0.0026 0.0025 (OK.)
10 in. 24 in.
v 55.3
Therefore, throughout the span use 2 #5 horizontal bars at a vertical spacing of 12 in. and use #5
two-legged stirrups as a spacing of 10 in.
17-2 Repeat Problem 17-1, but include the dead load of the wall. Assume that stirrups
crossing the lines AB and CD have a capacity ∑ equal to one-third or more
of the shear due to the column load.
This problem is solved similarly to Problem 17-1. The factored dead load of the wall can
be added to the factored load applied on top of the beam. In this case, the vertical
reinforcement is designed such that the dead load of the wall portion below the lines AB
and CD can be transferred to the level at least above those lines.
17-3 Design a corbel to support a factored vertical load of 120 kips acting at 5 in. from
the face of a column. You should include a horizontal load equal to 20 percent of the
factored vertical load. The column and corbel are 14 in. wide. The concrete in the
column and corbel was cast monolithically. Use 5000-psi normal-weight concrete
and .
17-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Flexural Steel
648
Af 1.0 in.2
0.75 60 (0.9 16)
1.0 60
a 1 in.
0.85 5 14
648
Af 0.93 in.2
0.75 60(16 1/ 2)
Horizontal Stirrups
Area required: Avf / 3 0.63 in.2
Use 2 #4 closed stirrups, As 0.80 in.2
17-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
3 #7 welded
to the angle
plate
9 in.
2 #4
closed ties
9 in.
2 #4
bars
14 in. 8 in.
Fig. S17-2
17-4 Repeat Problem 17-3, but with a factored vertical load of 100 kips and a factored
horizontal load of 40 kips.
17-5 Figure P17-5 shows the dapped support region of a simple beam. The factored
vertical reaction is 100 kips, and you should include a horizontal reaction of 20 kips.
Use normal-weight concrete with and reinforcement with
(weldable). The beam is 16 in. wide.
(a) Isolate the D-region.
(b) Draw a truss to support the reaction.
(c) Detail the reinforcement.
The factored load on the dap is 100 kips. To include in the design we shall design the dap for
Vn 100/ 0.75 133 kips
In addition, design the dap for a horizontal force of
H n 0.2 133 26.6 kips
17-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
D-region
2.5
120
B F
10.5
9
15
17
4
14
47.9°
A 147 D
133
133
8
14.5
19
133
67.2°
15
C 42.2°
147 E 203 G
2.5
4 6 3.5 16 10.5
10 30
17
4 #5 closed 4 #5 U-stirrups @ 3 in.
double-leg stirrups 4 #5 U-stirrups @ 2 in. top reinforcement
2 #4 U bars
@ 3.5 in. B F
5 # 7 with left ends
D welded to the angle plate
C E G
bottom reinforcement
22
48
17-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Assume 2.5 in. from the bottom of the beam to the centroid of the steel at C, 2 in. at A,
and assume the centroid of the compression force B-F is 2.5 in. below the top of the
beam.
Solve Joint at B
V 0 N BC 133 kips
9.5
H 0 N BF 133 120 kips
10.5
Locate node at D
Strut CD is axially compressed by the horizontal tensile force in AD and the
vertical tensile force in DE. The horizontal distance from C to D is
147
14.5 16.0 in.
133
Solve Joint at E
10.5
Horizontal component in EF 133 55.9 kips
25
Axial force in EF = 144 kips
Force in EG = 147 + 55.9 = 203
17-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Joint F
Horizontal force to the right of F = 176 kips
As a check on the calculations, cut a section parallel to EF and sum moments
about F to calculate the force in EG 133 36 in. +26.6 10.5 = TEF 25
TEF 203 kips OK
Strut AB
Assume the concrete outside the ties spalls at B. Remaining thickness of strut
16 2 1.5 13 in.
179
Width 4.32 in.
3.19 13
Strut BF
120
Width 2.89 in.
3.19 13
Strut CD
Use full thickness.
198
Width 3.88 in.
3.19 16
Strut BE
144
Width 2.82 in.
3.19 16
Ties DE and FG
Use 4 #5 double leg stirrups with 135 hooks spaced at 3 in. o.c. for tie DE and 4
#5 double-leg stirrups with 135 hooks spaced at 2-in. for tie FG.
Ties AD
As 147 / 60 2.45 in.2
Use 5 #7 bars. Weld these to the angle at A.
We need to extend these bars past D a distance equal to the development length.
These bars are considered top bars, from Table A-6, d 55.2 48.3 in. So,
extend the bars 50 in past D.
17-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Tie CE
As 2.45 in.2
Provide 2 #8 U bars spaced 1 in. clear above the bottom steel. Lap splice them
with the tension reinforcement in the bottom of the beam using a splice length of
Strut AB. Use only horizontal steel. Try 2 #4 U bars spaced equally at 3.5 in. o.c.
A 2 0.20 in.2
h sh 0.0071
bsv 16 in. 3.5 in.
h 47.9
h sin h 0.0053 0.0030 , OK.
Strut CD. Use only horizontal steel. Try 2 #5 U bars spaced equally at 3.83 in. o.c.
17-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 18
18-1 Check moment and shear strength at the base of the structural wall shown in Fig. P18-
1. Also, show that the given horizontal and vertical reinforcement satisfies all of the ACI
Code requirements regarding minimum reinforcement percentage and maximum
spacing. The given lateral loads are equivalent wind forces, considering both direct
lateral forces and the effects of any torsion. Use a load factor of 1.6 for the wind load
effects. The given vertical loads represent dead loads, and you can assume that the
vertical live loads are equal to 60 percent of the dead loads. Assume the wall is
constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a compressive strength of 4500 psi.
Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
2. Calculate flexural strength. The total area of vertical wall reinforcement is:
240 in.
Ast 2 0.20 in.2 w
0.40 in.2 8.00 in.2
s 12 in.
For 4500 psi concrete, 1 = 0.825. Then, from Eq. (18-28) the depth to the neutral axis is:
0.0192 0.0444
c 240 in. 19.3 in.
0.851 2 0.85 0.825 2 0.0444
w
This is very small compared to d (taken as 0.8 ℓw), so this is clearly a tension-controlled section
and = 0.9. From Eq. (18-25a), the tension force in the vertical reinforcement is:
c 240 19.3
T Ast f y w
8.00 in. 60 ksi
2
441 kips
w 240
18-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
And, from Eq. (18-29) the nominal moment strength at the base of the wall is:
c 240 in. 240 in. 19.3 in.
M n T w Nu w 441 k 207 k
2 2 2 2
53, 000 k-in. 22,800 k-in. 75,800 k-in. 6320 k-ft
3. Check shear strength. Because the wall is subjected to compression, we are permitted to use
Eq. (18-41) to determine the concrete contribution to shear strength. For this calculation we will
assume d = 0.8 x ℓw = 0.8 x 240 = 192 in., as permitted in ACI Code Section 11.9.4.
Vc 2 f c hd 2 1 4500 psi 10 in. 192 in.
258, 000 lbs 258 kips
Using = 0.75 for shear, the design strength contribution from the concrete is:
Vc 0.75 258 193 kips Vu
Thus, no horizontal reinforcement is required for shear strength. However, because Vu exceeds
one-half of Vc, the reinforcement requirements in ACI Code Section 11.9.9 must be satisfied.
Horizontal reinforcement:
From Eq. (18-45a), the percentage of horizontal reinforcement is:
Av ,horiz 2 0.20 in.2
t 0.0025 0.0025 (o.k.)
h s2 10 in. 16 in.
The maximum center-to-center spacing for the horizontal reinforcement is the smallest of ℓw/5 (48
in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the spacing of 16 in. for the horizontal reinforcement is ok.
Vertical reinforcement:
Because the wall aspect ratio, hw/ℓw = 59ft/20ft = 2.95, exceeds 2.5, the minimum required
percentage of vertical reinforcement is 0.0025. From step 2, ℓ = 0.00333, which exceeds the
minimum value. The maximum center-to-center spacing for the vertical reinforcement is the
smallest of ℓw/3 (80 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the provided spacing of 12 in. for the
vertical reinforcement is ok.
18-2
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
18-2 Design a uniform distribution of vertical and horizontal reinforcement for the
structural wall shown in Fig. P18-2. Your design must satisfy all of the ACI Code
requirements, as well as the requirements for minimum reinforcement percentage and
minimum spacing. The given lateral loads are equivalent wind forces, considering both
direct lateral forces and the effects of any torsion. Use a load factor of 1.6 for the wind
load effects. Assume the wall is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength of 4000 psi. Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
2. Flexural design. Based on the results from Problem 18-1 (a wall with similar design base
moment and similar dimensions), select a trial value for ℓ = 0.0035. Then, from Eq. (18-26b),
fy 60 ksi
0.0035 0.0525
f c 4 ksi
For 4000 psi concrete, 1 = 0.85. Then, from Eq. (18-28) the depth to the neutral axis is:
0.0103 0.0525
c 240 in. 18.2 in.
0.851 2 0.85 0.85 2 0.0525
w
This is very small compared to d (taken as 0.8 ℓw), so this is clearly a tension-controlled section
and = 0.9. The total area of vertical wall reinforcement is:
Ast h w 0.0035 10 in. 240 in. 8.40 in.2
From Eq. (18-25a), the tension force in the vertical reinforcement is:
c 240 18.2
T Ast f y w
8.40 in. 60 ksi
2
466 kips
w 240
And, from Eq. (18-29) the nominal moment strength at the base of the wall is:
c 240 in. 240 in. 18.2 in.
M n T w Nu w 466 k 99.0 k
2 2 2 2
55,900 k-in. 11, 000 k-in. 66,900 k-in. 5570 k-ft
18-3
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
For a wall with relatively low axial load, the nominal moment strength should increase approximately
linearly with increases in the percentage of vertical reinforcement. Thus,
Mu 5280
(req'd.) (trial) 0.0035 0.00368
M n (trial) 5020
Round this up a little and try ℓ = 0.0038. Then, redo the calculations to find:
0.0570, c 19.3 in., Ast 9.12 in.2 , T 503 kips, and
M n 5350 k-ft M u (o.k.)
3. Shear Design. The aspect ratio for this wall is, hw/ℓw = 24/20 = 1.20. Thus, this is a short wall and
the shear strength contribution from the concrete is probably given by Eq. (18-43). Using d = 0.8 x ℓw
= 192 in., results in:
Nu d
Vc 3.3 f c hd
4 w
99, 000 lbs 192 in.
3.3 1 4000 psi 10 in. 192 in.
4 240 in.
(401, 000 19,800) lbs 421, 000 lbs 421 kips
Before accepting this value, we will check the value of Vc from Eq. (18-44). For this flexural-shear
strength equation, we need to evaluate the ratio of Mu/Vu at the critical section above the base of the
wall, as defined in Fig. 18-19. For this wall, ℓw/2 = 10 ft, governs. At that section the factored
moment is,
Thus, the ratio of Mu/Vu = 2480/280 = 8.86 ft. Using this value, the denominator in the second term
of Eq. (18-43) is,
Mu
w 8.86 ft 10 ft 1.14 ft
Vu 2
Because this is a negative number, Eq. (18-44) is not valid for this wall. So, using = 0.75 and the
value for Vc from Eq. (18-43):
Vc 0.75 421 kips 316 kips Vu
18-4
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Thus, no horizontal reinforcement is required for shear strength. However, because Vu exceeds
one-half of Vc, the reinforcement requirements in ACI Code Section 11.9.9 must be satisfied.
Horizontal reinforcement:
Use 2 No. 4 bars at 16 in. spacing in each face. Then, from Eq. (18-45a), the percentage of
horizontal reinforcement is:
Av ,horiz 2 0.20 in.2
t 0.0025 0.0025 (o.k.)
h s2 10 in. 16 in.
The maximum center-to-center spacing for the horizontal reinforcement is the smallest of ℓw/5 (48
in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the provided spacing of 16 in. for the horizontal reinforcement is
ok.
Vertical reinforcement:
Because t = 0.0025, the minimum value for ℓ in Eq. (18-46) is 0.0025. From the flexural
design, the provided value for ℓ = 0.00388, so it is o.k. Also, the selected spacing of 16 in. is less
than the smallest of ℓw/3 (80 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. (o.k.)
18-3 The structural wall shown in Fig. P18-3 is subjected to gravity loads (
and ) and an equivalent, static, lateral earthquake load, )
(torsion effects included). Check the moment strength at the base of the structural
wall assuming that the distance, , from the base of the structure to the lateral force,
, is equal to two-thirds of the wall height. Use a capacity-design approach to check
the shear strength of the wall and assume the distance, , is equal to one-half of the
wall height for this check. Also, show that the given horizontal and vertical
reinforcement in the web of the structural wall satisfies all of the ACI Code
requirements regarding minimum reinforcement percentage and maximum spacing.
Assume the wall is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a compressive
strength of 5000 psi. Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
Use:
for the flexural strength check
for the capacity-based shear strength check
2. Flexural strength. For a boundary element in tension, use Eq. (18-30) to find:
T As f y 12 0.79 in.2 60 ksi 569 kips
Assuming that the depth of the compression stress block does not exceed the size of the boundary
element, use Eq. (18-32) to find:
T Nu 569 k 135 k
a 8.28 in. ( 20 in., o.k.)
0.85 f c b 0.85 5 ksi 20 in.
18-5
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Assume d = ℓw – 20in./2 = 180 – 10 = 170 in. Then, from Eq. (18-33), the nominal moment
strength is:
a a
M n T d Nu w
2 2
8.28 in. 180 in. 8.28 in.
569 k 170 in. 135 k
2 2
(94, 400 11, 600)k-in. 8830 kip-ft
With a = 8.28 in., it is clear that this is a tension-controlled section, and thus = 0.9. So,
M n 0.9 8830 7950 kip-ft Mu
The wall is substantially over-designed in flexure and we should reduce the steel in the boundary
element to reduce the shear required to develop the flexural strength. One possible redesign is to
use eight No. 9 bars in each boundary element. This leads to the final result of Mn = 6860 kip-ft.
3. Design shear (determine capacity-based design shear using original flexural design). Assume
that the probable axial load is:
N pr N D N L 150 k 100 k 250 kips
With this axial load the wall moment strength will be reevaluated and referred to as the probable
moment strength, Mpr.
First, the depth of the compression stress block is,
T Nu 569 k 250 k
a 9.64 in.
0.85 f c b 0.85 5 ksi 20 in.
This is larger than calculated previously, but it is still clear that the tension steel in the boundary
element will be yielding. With this value of a, the moment strength is:
a a
M pr T d N pr w
2 2
94, 000 k-in. 21,300 k-in.
115, 000 kip-in. 9610 kip-ft
With this moment and assuming that x = 0.5 x 60 ft = 30 ft, the capacity-based design shear is,
M pr 9610 k-ft
Vu (cap-based) 320 kips
0.5hw 0.5 60 ft
4. Check shear strength. For this wall, the value of Acv in Eq. (18-48) is:
Acv h w 10 in. 180 in. 1800 in.2
Because this is a slender wall, c = 2.0. Eq. (18-45b) will be used to determine t for the distributed
horizontal reinforcement.
18-6
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Using the values calculated here, the nominal shear strength of the wall from Eq. (11-48) is,
Vn Acv c f c t f y
1800 in.2 2 1 5000 psi 0.0025 60, 000 psi
1800 in.2 141 psi 150 psi 524, 000 lbs 524 kips
The vertical and horizontal steel percentages in the web of the wall (both 0.0025) and the bar spacing
(16 in. both horizontal and vertical) satisfy the requirements of ACI Code Section 11.9.9, which are
applicable for this wall.
18-4 The structural wall shown in Fig. P18-4 is subjected to gravity loads ( and
) and a single, equivalent, static, lateral earthquake load ( ) at the
top of the wall (at roof level). For the given uniform distribution of vertical and
horizontal reinforcement, check the moment strength at the base of the wall and use a
capacity-deisgn approach to check the shear strength of the wall. Also, show that the
given horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the structural wall satisfies all of the ACI
Code requirements regarding minimum reinforcement percentage and maximum
spacing. Assume the wall is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength of 4000 psi. Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
2. Flexural strength. From Eq. (18-454a) the vertical reinforcement percentage is:
2 0.31 in.2
Av ,vert
0.00388
h s1 10 in. 16 in.
From Eq. (18-26b) the reinforcement ratio for the vertical reinforcement is:
fy 60 ksi
0.00388 0.0582
f c 4 ksi
18-7
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
For 4000 psi concrete, 1 = 0.85. Then, from Eq. (18-28), the depth to the neutral axis is:
0.0075 0.0582
c 240 in. 18.8 in.
0.851 2 0.85 0.85 2 0.0582
w
This is very small compared to d (0.8ℓw = 192 in.), so this is clearly a tension-controlled section
and = 0.9. For the longitudinal steel,
240 in.
Ast 2 0.31 in.2 9.30 in.2
16 in.
The wall is substantially over-designed in flexure and we should reduce the vertical
reinforcement in the wall to reduce the shear required to develop the flexural strength. One
possible redesign is to use two No. 4 bars at a 16 in. spacing in each face. For this reinforcement
ℓ = 0.0025 (the minimum value) and the design flexural strength, Mn = 3670 kip-ft.
3. Design shear (determine capacity-based design shear using original flexural design). Assume
that the probable axial load is:
N pr N D N L 80 k 40 k 120 kips
18-8
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
With this probable moment strength, the capacity-based design shear is,
M pr 6210 k-ft
Vu (cap-based) 414 kips
hw 15 ft
4. Check shear strength. For this wall, Eq. (18-45b) will be used to determine t for the distributed
horizontal reinforcement.
2 0.20 in.2
Av ,horiz
t 0.0025
h s2 10 in. 16 in.
Because this is a squat wall (hw/ℓw = 0.75), c = 3.0. Thus, the nominal shear strength of the wall from
Eq. (11-48) is,
Vn Acv c f c t f y
2400 in.2 3 1 4000 psi 0.0025 60, 000 psi
2400 in.2 190 psi 150 psi 815, 000 lbs 815 kips
The vertical and horizontal steel percentages in the web of the wall (both ≥ 0.0025) and the bar
spacing (16 in. both horizontal and vertical) satisfy the requirements of ACI Code Section 11.9.9,
which are applicable for this wall.
18-5 Design a uniform distribution of vertical and horizontal reinforcement for the first story
of the structural wall shown in Fig. P18-5. The given horizontal loads are strength-level
static equivalent earthquake forces, so use a load factor of 1.0. The vertical dead and
live loads are from the tributary area adjacent to the wall. Assume the given lateral
loads include the direct shear force and any torsional effects that need to be considered.
18-9
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Use a compressive strength of 4000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement. Your final design
should satisfy all ACI Code requirements for minimum reinforcement percentages and
maximum spacing.
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
Calculate :
( ) ( )
Continue with the shear design. Calculate ( ) based on the probable moment capacity of
the wall and assuming that the lateral force resultant is located at .
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( )
18-10
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
( ) ⁄ ⁄ ( )
Calculate :
( ⁄ )
( √ ) ( √ )
Therefore,
( )
The capacity and demand are approximately equal, so the horizontal reinforcement is adequate.
Final design:
18-11
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 19
19-1 Use Eq. (19-28) to check the need for specially confined boundary elements in the
structural wall described in Problem 18-3. Assume the design displacement, , at the
top of the wall is 0.6 ft. Use all of the dimensions, loading information, and material
properties given in Problem 18-3. If a specially confined boundary element is required,
define the required vertical and horizontal dimensions for the boundary element.
1. Building drift ratio. The ratio, u/hw, represents the building drift ratio due to the design
earthquake for the building in question. We are given a value for the design displacement, u, at the
top of the building, so the building drift ratio is:
u 0.6 ft
Building drift ratio 0.010 (1%)
hw 60 ft
2. Limit for neutral axis depth. Eq. (19-27) gives a limiting value for the neutral axis depth. For
larger values, the wall boundary elements must be confined.
15 ft 12 in./ft
c(limit) w
30.0 in.
600 u hw 600 0.010
3. Calculated neutral axis depth. The depth of the neutral axis for this check should come from
the calculation of the probable moment strength of the wall, which was calculated in step 3 of
Problem 18-3. In that calculation the depth of the equivalent stress block, a, was found to be 9.64
in. Then, using 1 = 0.80 for 5000 psi concrete, the corresponding neutral axis depth is:
a 9.64 in.
c 12.1 in. c(limit)
1 0.80
Therefore, special confinement reinforcement is not required in the wall boundary elements.
19-1
© 2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
19-2 Use Eq. (19-29) to check the need for specially confined boundary elements in the
structural wall described in Problem 18-3. Use all of the dimensions, loading
information, and material properties given in Problem 18-3. If a specially confined
boundary element is required, define the required vertical and horizontal dimensions
for the boundary element.
2. Wall section properties. To determine the gross area and moment of inertia of the wall, divide
the wall into rectangular pieces representing the web and the two boundary elements. Then,
A A(web) 2 A(boundary)
10 in. 140 in. 2 20 in. 2200 in.2
2
And,
10 1403 20 203
I I i Ai yi2 0 2 20 20 802
i 12 12
7.43 106 in.4
Also,
180 in.
y w
90 in.
2 2
3. Combined stress in edge of wall at base of wall. Eq. (19-28) will be used to find the combined
stress at the edge of the wall at its base. If that stress exceeds the limit of 0.2fc', then we will need use
special confinement reinforcement in the wall boundary and continue that reinforcement up the wall
until we reach a section where the combined stress in the edge of the wall is less than 0.15fc'. Using
the values from steps 1 and 2:
Nu M u y
fc
A I
135 k 72, 000 k-in. 90 in.
2200 in. 2
7.43 106 in.4
0.061 ksi 0.872 ksi 0.934 ksi 0.2 5 ksi 1.0 ksi
Therefore, special confinement reinforcement is not required in the wall boundary elements.
19-2